Users Manual PC Software IV Series Visio PDF

207GB
1 Getting Started
Installation and
2 Connection
Vision Sensor
3 Basic Operation
4 Settings Navigator
(Setting the Judgment Condition)
IV Series 5 Operating/Adjusting
Useful Features/
6
User’s Manual
Various Functions
(PC Software) 7 Simulator
Controlling with
Read this manual before use. 8 the Input/Output Line
After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
9 Specifications
Status Table,
A Troubleshooting
Introduction
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in minor or moderate injury.
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

product damage as well as property damage.
It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.
It indicates additional information on proper operation.
It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.
Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If
there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks
of their respective companies.
Safety Information for IV Series
Safety Information for IV Series
General Precautions
yyDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
yyThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in
hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
yyYou must verify that the IV Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and
performance before the start and the operation of the IV Series.
yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of
a problem occurring.
yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV Series if it is used in manner
that differs from the IV Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the IV
Series are modified by yourself.
yyWhen the IV Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance
may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It
may cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals.
yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.
Safety precautions on LED product
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual.
Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result.
yyDo not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.
yyDo not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this product is not
automatically stopped when it is disassembled.
yyDo not direct the beam at people or into areas where people might be present.
yyBe careful of the path of the LED beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be
exposed to the specular or diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective
enclosure.
yyInstall this product so that the path of the LED beam is not as the same height as that of human
eye.
207GB 1
Important Instructions
Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV Series and to
ensure that it is used properly.
Precautions on use
yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when
the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a
product damage.
yyUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
yyFor instructions
yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or
part of the setting data may be lost.
yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor. Failure to do so may cause
a malfunction.
yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol.
Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit.
yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable,
wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
yyFor external master image registration
If the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when
using Ext. Master Save] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the
internal sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write
for 100,000 times.
yyFor automatic focus function
yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation.
This will not activate during the operation.
yyFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are
guaranteed to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for
each program, set [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] to [Common] for extending the life-span.
yyDo not apply shock or vibration during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may
cause a product damage.
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs
In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV Series in an abnormal
condition could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
Contact our office for repair.
yyIf water or debris enters the IV Series.
yyIf the IV Series is dropped or the case is damaged.
yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV Series.
2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Precautions on installation
yyTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to
do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
yyOutdoors
yyAltitude above 2000 m
yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated
yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight
yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases
yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact
yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit
yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
yyMount the sensor onto the insulated attached mounting adapter.
yyGround the FG cable (drain cable) of the sensor.
yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed.
yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible.
yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic
field (such as solenoid or chopper).
yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line.
yyFor power supply
yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC
power supply configured with an isolation transformer.
yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground
terminal.
yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration.
yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.
- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 3

Precautions on Regulations and Standards
For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/
IV-2000M/IV-2000MA
UL Certification
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.
yyUL File No. E301717
yyCategory NRKH, NRKH7
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product.
yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
yyPower supply/ External input/ Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only.
yyUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A.
yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)
CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
zz
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN60947-5-2, Class A
EMS: EN60947-5-2
yyThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
zz
Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
yyApplicable Standard: EN62471

Software License Agreement

NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”)
CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF THE [IV-H1] (THIS “SOFTWARE”), YOU ARE
AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE TO ANY TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THIS SOFTWARE.
1. Definition
1.1 “use” or “using” means to access, install, download, copy or otherwise benefit from using the
functionality of this Software.
1.2 “This Software” means the software and all associated documentation provided by KEYENCE.
2. Grant of License.
Conditioned upon compliance with all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement, KEYENCE grants
you a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to install this Software on all computers in order to use
the KEYENCE product. You may make one copy of this Software for backup or archive purposes only.
3. Restrictions.
3.1 Except for installation of updates or new functions provided by KEYENCE, you may not modify or
add any function to this Software.
3.2 You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble this Software.
3.3 You may not create derivative works based on this Software.
3.4 Other than expressly stated by KEYENCE, you may not resell, retransfer, rent or otherwise
redistribute this Software to any third parties.
4. Intellectual Property Rights.
Except as expressly stated herein, KEYENCE reserves all right, title and interest in this Software, and
all associated copyrights, trademarks, and other intellectual property rights therein.
5. Disclaimer.
Keyence is licensing this Software to you “AS IS” and without any warranty of any kind. In no event will
KEYENCE or its suppliers be liable to you for any damages,
claims, costs or any lost profits caused by using this Software.
6. Termination.
6.1 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically if you destroy this Software and the
copy of this Software in your possession or voluntarily return this Software to us.
6.2 Your license under this Agreement will terminate automatically without any notice from KEYENCE
if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Promptly upon
termination, you shall cease all use of this Software and destroy all copies, full or partial, of this
Software in your possession or control.
6.3 You will compensate KEYENCE for costs or any lost profits caused by your violation or breach of
any term of this Agreement.
7. Governing Law.
7.1 This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws of
Japan without regards to the principles of conflicts of law.
7.2 If any part of this Agreement is found void and unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of the
balance of this Agreement, which shall remain valid and enforceable according to its terms and
conditions.

Version of the IV Series
Version of the IV Series
You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) and IV-Navigator
(IV-H1) from the KEYENCE web site.
Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/
Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)
Version Description
R1.00.00 The initial version.
R1.01.00 The processing time has been speeded up.
The processing time and the response time to program switching input have been
R1.10.00
speeded up.
This is the version of this document.
The following functions have been added.
yyLogic output
R2.00.00 yyTotal status NG output
yyRUN output
yyFTP client function
yyField network (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET)
IV-Navigator (IV-H1)
Version Description
R1.00.00 The initial version.
R1.01.00 Compatibility with German.
R1.02.00 Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).
The following functions have been added.
yyAddition of the IV-Simulator function
yyAddition of the image capture function to the o peration of the [Save Image] button
R1.10.00
yyAddition of the [Size] selection function to “Remove Outline”
yyAddition of the [Display Master Image] button to “Tool Auto Tuning”
yyAddition of the [Language] button (language selection) to the Activation Menu screen
This is the version of this document.
R2.00.00 Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.
IVP-Convertor has been added.

Structure of This Manual
Structure of This Manual

This chapter explains the system configuration and overview
1 Getting Started of IV Series, package contents, and names and functions of 1
each part.
Installation and 2
2
This chapter explains the procedures for installing and
Connection connecting the sensor and for setting up the PC.
3
3
This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow
Basic Operation
of the IV Series.
4
4 Settings Navigator This chapter explains how to set the sensors using the
(Setting the Judgment Condition) Settings Navigator.
5
5 Operating/Adjusting This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IV Series.
6
Useful Features/
6 Various Functions
This chapter explains the useful and detailed features.
7
7 Simulator
This chapter explains the functions and operations of the
Simulator.
8
Controlling with 9
8
This chapter explains how the input and output terminals
the Input/Output Line control each operation.
A
9 Specifications This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.
A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

Contents
Contents
Introduction
Symbols Chapter 2 Installation and Connection
Cautions Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Safety Information for IV Series..............................1 Checking the view and installed distance.........2-2
General Precautions............................................1 Mounting the sensor.........................................2-4
Safety precautions on LED product.....................1 Mounting the mounting adapter.....................2-4
Important Instructions..............................................2 Mounting on the wall..............................2-4
Precautions on use..............................................2 Mounting from the jig side......................2-4
Measures to be taken when an abnormality Mounting the sensor onto
occurs..................................................................2 the mounting adapter.....................................2-4
Precautions on installation...................................3 Unmounting the sensor.....................................2-5
Precautions on Regulations and Standards............4 Mounting the attachment..................................2-6
For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/ Using the dome attachment...........................2-6
IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA............4 Mounting the dome attachment.............2-6
UL Certification.................................................4 Installed distance of
CE Marking.......................................................4 the dome attachment.............................2-6
Software License Agreement...............................5 Using the polarizing filter attachment............2-7
Version of the IV Series...........................................6 Cables..................................................................2-8
Operation software of the sensor Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor....2-8
(IV-150/500/2000)................................................6 Specification of the circuit and current of
IV-Navigator (IV-H1).............................................6 the sensor.......................................................2-10
Structure of This Manual.........................................7 Input circuit..................................................2-10
Contents..................................................................8 No-voltage input
(When the NPN output is selected).....2-10
Chapter 1 Getting Started Voltage input
(When the PNP output is selected)......2-10
System Configuration...........................................1-2 Output circuit...............................................2-10
Basic configurations of IV-Series......................1-2
Connecting the PC and single sensor...........1-2
When the NPN output is selected........2-10
Connecting the PC and multiple sensors......1-3
When the PNP output is selected........2-10
Connecting the sensor and the PC.................2-11
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4 Connecting directly .....................................2-11
IV Series...........................................................1-4 Connecting via network...............................2-11
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...............1-4 Connecting the Ethernet cable....................2-12
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)....1-5 Setting up the PC...............................................2-14
Judgment processing flow................................1-6 Required environment for the PC to
Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8 be connected..................................................2-14
Sensor...............................................................1-8 OS...............................................................2-14
Optional parts for the sensor.............................1-8 Hardware.....................................................2-14
Dome attachment..........................................1-8 Operating conditions....................................2-14
Polarized visible light filter attachment..........1-8 Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...................2-14
Infrared polarization filter attachment............1-8 Installation destination of the software
Power I/O cable (reference)......................................................2-15
(M12 12pin - stranded wire)...........................1-9 Deleting the software (uninstall)......................2-15
Mounting adapter...........................................1-9 Changing the PC settings
Front cover (for replacement)........................1-9 (IP address setting).........................................2-16
Bracket..........................................................1-9 For Windows 7.............................................2-16
Communication cables....................................1-10 For Windows XP..........................................2-16
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-10
NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable
(M12 4pin - RJ-45).......................................1-10 Chapter 3 Basic Operation
IV Software.....................................................1-10 Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-11 Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
Sensor.............................................................1-11 Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Name and function of each part of Operation flow when the power is turned on.....3-5
the sensor............................................1-11 Operation for initial startup of
Operation of the indicator light.............1-12 the IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)................3-6
Operation for initial startup of
the IV-Navigator (Network Connection)............3-6
Starting the IV-Navigator...............................3-6
Searching for a sensor to be connected........3-7

Contents
Specifying sensor to be connected by 3. Tool Settings

IP address......................................................3-8 (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28
Operation for initial startup of the sensor..........3-9 Selecting a tool according to
Resetting to the Factory Default Settings...........3-10 its intended purpose........................................4-28
Initializing the sensor......................................3-10 Types of tools..................................................4-28
Basic Operation for Tools...................................3-11 Main screen for the Tool settings....................4-30
Operating the image tool bar..........................3-11 Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool...........4-31
Editing the tool window...................................3-12 Adding a tool................................................4-31
Editing a tool................................................4-31
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator Copying a tool..............................................4-32
Deleting a tool..............................................4-32
(Setting the Judgment Condition) Outline tool......................................................4-34
Settings Navigator................................................4-2 Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-34
Flow in the Settings Navigator..........................4-2 Setting the Outline tool................................4-35
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3 Setting a search region........................4-37
Starting the Settings Navigator.........................4-3 Setting a sensitivity..............................4-37
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow....4-4 Settings for removing outlines.............4-38
Finishing the Settings Navigator.......................4-5 Setting a tool name..............................4-38
Finishing by completing all steps...................4-5 Extended Functions for the Outline tool......4-39
Finishing without completing the steps..........4-5 Rotation Range....................................4-39
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)....4-6 Margin..................................................4-40
Setting the Image Optimization.........................4-6 Search Algorithm.................................4-40
Main screen for the Image Optimization...........4-7 Color Area/Area tool........................................4-42
Setting the Trigger Options...............................4-8 Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool.....4-42
Settings for the Trigger Options.....................4-8 Setting the Color Area/Area tool..................4-44
Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-10 Mask settings.......................................4-47
Brightness Adjustment....................................4-11 Setting the upper limit..........................4-48
Brightness Adjustment settings...................4-11 Setting the tool name...........................4-49
Adjusting brightness....................................4-12 Extended Functions of
Focus Adjustment...........................................4-13 the Color Area/Area tool..............................4-50
Focus adjustment for Advanced settings for color extraction
the auto focusing type.................................4-13 (for color type only)..............................4-51
Focus adjustment for Fixed Reference Area..........................4-51
the manual focusing type.............................4-14 Position Adjustment tool..................................4-53
Extended Functions for Setting items for
the Image Optimization...................................4-16 the Position Adjustment tool........................4-54
Items of extended functions for Setting the position adjustment tool.............4-55
the Image Optimization................................4-16 Setting a search region........................4-57
Imaging Area...............................................4-17 Setting a sensitivity..............................4-57
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only).........4-18 Settings for disabling outlines..............4-58
Color filters (color type only)........................4-18 Extended Functions for
Lighting........................................................4-19 the Position Adjustment tool........................4-59
2. Master Registration (Registering Rotation Range....................................4-59
an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)........4-20 Margin..................................................4-59
Main screen for the Master Registration.........4-20 4. Output Assignment
Registering the master image.........................4-21 (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)...4-60
Registering the Live image as Main screen for the Output Assignment..........4-60
a master image............................................4-21 Setting range of the Output Assignment.........4-61
Master registration from Default value........................................4-61
the image history in the sensor....................4-22 Setting the Output Assignment.......................4-61
Master registration using Extended functions for
the file saved in the PC................................4-23 the Output Assignment....................................4-62
When using batch backup files (*.iva)....4-23 Extended functions items for the Output
When using image capture files Assignment..................................................4-62
(*.ivp)...................................................4-24 Setting the Total Status Conditions.................4-63
Extended Functions for Setting Logics.................................................4-64
the Master Registration...................................4-25
Items of extended functions for
the Master Registration...............................4-25
Brightness Correction..................................4-25

Contents
Correcting the distorted images due to

Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting the installation..............................................5-30
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2 Achieving adequate image brightness.........5-30
Turning on the power and If brightness cannot be adjusted in
starting an operation.........................................5-2 the Automatic Brightness Adjustment....5-30
Exiting the sensor settings and starting an If brightness cannot be adjusted
operation...........................................................5-2 due to uneven brightness....................5-30
Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]........5-3 Achieving good focus..................................5-31
Names and Functions of the Screen in If good focus cannot be achieved by
[Run] / [Program]..................................................5-4 the Automatic Focus Adjustment.........5-31
Main screen in [Run] / [Program]......................5-4 Reducing the image blur..............................5-31
Enlarging the image display..............................5-6 Reducing the shininess of the glossy or
Selecting the tool whose information to metal surface...............................................5-32
be displayed......................................................5-6 Using the Automatic Brightness
Selecting the tool from Adjustment...........................................5-32
the status gauge....................................5-6 Using the dome attachment.................5-32
Selecting the tool by Using the polarizing filter attachment....5-32
clicking it on the image..........................5-6 Installing the sensor at an angle..........5-32
Selecting a display method for tools.................5-7 Adjusting the color tint (for color type only).5-33
Display methods for tools..............................5-7 Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......
For color type.........................................5-7 5-33
For monochrome type............................5-8 Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target
Displaying the statistical information...............5-10 position............................................................5-33
Displaying the statistical information...........5-10 Tool settings.........................................5-33
Hiding the statistical information..................5-11 Processing during an operation...........5-33
Displaying the tool information........................5-12 Stabilizing the position adjustment..................5-34
Displaying the tool information....................5-12 Basic adjustments................................5-34
Hiding the tool information...........................5-13 If the target tilts and the position
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14 adjustment becomes unstable.............5-34
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting If the position adjustment becomes
the Judgment Condition)....................................5-15 unstable due to the effect of the unwanted
Using the images taken in outlines................................................5-34
the Test mode......................................5-15 If the outline of the reference target cannot
Using the image history saved in be detected..........................................5-35
the sensor............................................5-15 Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-35
Using the image files saved in the PC....5-15 Basic adjustments................................5-35
Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-16 If the outline cannot be detected when the
The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning.......5-16 target becomes out of position.............5-35
Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning..................5-17 If the detection becomes unstable due to
Registering the OK/NG images to be the effect of the unwanted outline other
used for the Tool Auto Tuning..........................5-19 than the target......................................5-35
Register the images taken with the sensor....5-19 If the target tilts and the outline cannot be
Registering the images from detected...............................................5-36
the image history saved in the sensor.........5-21 If the match rate difference between the
Registering the image files saved in high and low-quality-targets is small....5-36
the PC..........................................................5-23 If the outline of the target cannot be
Confirming or deleting the images detected...............................................5-36
registered for the Tool Auto Tuning.................5-26 Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool................5-36
Confirming the OK/NG images....................5-26 Basic adjustments................................5-36
Deleting the OK/NG images........................5-26 If the color you wish to judge cannot be
Confirming the registration results in extracted..............................................5-36
the test mode..................................................5-27 If the area search becomes unstable due
Tool Auto Tuning by to unwanted colors being extracted.....5-36
the previous registration information...............5-27 Shortening the Processing Time........................5-37
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-29 For the processing time..................................5-37
Stabilizing the judgment process by Flow of the internal process.................5-37
taking a clear image of the target....................5-29 Shortening the imaging processing time.........5-38
Imaging the target widely.............................5-29 Selecting the tool............................................5-38
Adjusting the installed distance (WD)....5-29 Shortening the processing time of each tool...5-38
Using the digital zooming function.......5-29 Shortening the processing time of the Outline

Contents
tool...............................................................5-38 Setting the Input and Output Information of

Shortening the processing time of the Color the Sensor..........................................................6-26
Area/Area tool..............................................5-39 Input Settings..................................................6-26
Shortening the processing time of the position Output Settings...............................................6-27
adjustment...................................................5-39 I/O Monitor......................................................6-28
I/O Polarity......................................................6-28
Chapter 6 Setting the Advanced Information of
the Sensor..........................................................6-30
Useful Features/Various Functions Advanced settings for the sensor....................6-30
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2 [Environmental] tab......................................6-30
Useful features while running............................6-2 [FTP] tab......................................................6-30
Useful features during installation/adjustment....6-3 [Setup Adjustment] tab................................6-30
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-6 [Backup] tab.................................................6-31
Overview of the program functions...................6-6 [Initialize/Update] tab...................................6-31
Things can be performed with the program [Sensor Information] tab..............................6-31
functions............................................................6-6 Environmental.................................................6-31
Preparing the program functions.......................6-7 Setting a device name.................................6-31
Preparation flow.............................................6-7 Changing the network settings....................6-32
Preparation procedures.................................6-7 Field Network..................................................6-33
Using the program functions Security...........................................................6-34
(changing over).................................................6-9 Setting the password lock....................6-34
When switching the program in Auto Focus Adjustment Position
the main screen in [Run]................................6-9 (auto focus type only)......................................6-35
When switching the program in FTP.................................................................6-36
the Program Details screen...........................6-9 Tilt Correction..................................................6-40
When switching the program by White Balance (for color type only).................6-42
the external input.........................................6-10 Image display direction...................................6-43
Displaying the Program Details screen...........6-11 Batch Backup..................................................6-44
Editing a program name..................................6-12 Transfer Program Settings..............................6-44
Copying a program.........................................6-12 Initialize Sensor...............................................6-44
Importing a program........................................6-13 Update Sensor................................................6-44
Initializing a program.......................................6-14 Sensor Information..........................................6-44
Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming Operating from the menu bar.............................6-45
the Images whose Status Result is NG).............6-15 [File] menu......................................................6-45
Displaying the Sensor's internal image Batch Backup..............................................6-45
history screen..................................................6-16 Transfer Program Settings...........................6-45
Displaying from the main screen in Export..........................................................6-45
[Run]....................................................6-16 Program Settings List..........................6-45
Displaying from the main screen in Statistics/Histogram Data....................6-45
[Program].............................................6-16 Exit...............................................................6-46
Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-17 [View] menu....................................................6-46
Saving all the image histories individually.......6-18 Statistics......................................................6-46
Backing up the image history in a batch.........6-19 Tool Data.....................................................6-46
Clearing the saved images.............................6-19 [Sensor] menu.................................................6-47
Changing the logging conditions of Disconnect...................................................6-47
the image history.............................................6-20 Reset Statistics............................................6-47
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images............6-21 Initialize Sensor...........................................6-47
Saving the sensor settings or Sensor Update.............................................6-47
the image history.............................................6-21 [Image] menu..................................................6-47
Backing up in a batch..................................6-21 Zoom...........................................................6-47
Saving images and screens displayed on Zoom Out.............................................6-47
the IV-Navigator individually........................6-22 Zoom In................................................6-47
Saving procedure.................................6-22 Fit to Window.......................................6-47
Confirming the saving destination of Tool Display Options....................................6-47
an image..............................................6-22 Manual Trigger.............................................6-48
Changing the saving destination of Capture........................................................6-48
an image .............................................6-22 Save Image..........................................6-48
Transferring the backed up settings to Show saved image file location...........6-48
the sensor.......................................................6-23 Change saved image file location........6-48
Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-25 [Setting] menu.................................................6-48

Contents
Manual trigger button...................................6-48 Export..........................................................7-18

Image while Running...................................6-48 Save Program Settings List.................7-18
Language.....................................................6-49 Save Statistics/Histogram Data in
[Window] menu...............................................6-49 operation..............................................7-18
Program Details...........................................6-49 Check Statistics/Histogram in operation......7-19
Sensor’s Internal Image History..................6-49 Terminate IV-Simulator................................7-19
I/O Settings..................................................6-49 Exit...............................................................7-19
Advanced Sensor Settings..........................6-49 [View] menu....................................................7-19
[Help] menu.....................................................6-50 Message when activating
User's Manual..............................................6-50 IV Sensor Simulator.....................................7-19
Version information......................................6-50 [Image] menu..................................................7-20
Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Zoom...........................................................7-20
Using the IVP-Converter....................................6-51 Reduce................................................7-20
Installing the IVP-Converter............................6-51 Enlarge................................................7-20
Starting up the IVP-Converter.........................6-51 Fit to Window.......................................7-20
Main screen of the IVP Converter...................6-51 Tool Display Options....................................7-20
Converting IVP data to BMP data...................6-52 Capture........................................................7-20
Save Image..........................................7-20
Chapter 7 Simulator Show saved image file location...........7-20
Simulator..............................................................7-2 Change saved image file location........7-20
[Setting] menu.................................................7-20
Sensor Setup Simulation.......................7-2
Language.....................................................7-20
IV Sensor Simulation.............................7-2
[Window] menu...............................................7-21
Confirming the image history.................7-2
Program Details...........................................7-21
Basic Operation of Simulator................................7-3
Sensor’s Internal Image History..................7-21
Operation flow of the Simulator.........................7-3
I/O Settings..................................................7-21
Saving the batch backup file.............................7-3
Advanced Sensor Settings..........................7-21
Starting the Simulator.......................................7-4
[Help] menu.....................................................7-21
Simulator screen and operation flow.................7-4
User's Manual..............................................7-21
Exiting the Simulator.........................................7-5
Version information......................................7-21
Transferring to the sensor.................................7-5
Names and Functions of the Screen....................7-6
Main screen of the Simulator............................7-6 Chapter 8
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation).....7-8 Controlling with Input/Output Line
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow.....7-8 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......8-2
1. Image Optimization.......................................7-9 External trigger..................................................8-2
Main screen for the Image Optimization........7-9 Internal trigger...................................................8-3
2. Master Registration.....................................7-10 Operating in the shortest cycle......................8-3
Main screen for the Master Registration......7-10 Importing the Status Output.................................8-4
Registering the master image......................7-11 Importing the total status /
Master registration from total status NG output.......................................8-4
the image history in the sensor............7-11 Importing the individual status output of
Master registration using the file each detection tool / logic.................................8-5
saved in the PC...................................7-11 Changing the timing of the status output..........8-6
3. Tool Settings................................................7-12 Cancelling One-Shot output..........................8-6
Main screen for the Tool settings.................7-12 Changing Over.....................................................8-7
4. Output Assignment......................................7-13 Registering the Master Image..............................8-8
Main screen for the Output Assignment......7-13 Clearing Errors...................................................8-10
IV Sensor Simulation..........................................7-14 Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation........7-14 Turned on...........................................................8-11
For Outline/Position Adjustment tool...........7-14 Input Response Time.........................................8-12
For Color Area/Area tool .............................7-16 Response time for
Starting the IV Sensor Simulation...................7-17 the switch program input.............................8-12
Operating from the menu bar.............................7-18 Response time for the external master
[File] menu......................................................7-18 registration input..........................................8-12
Open file......................................................7-18 Response time for the error clear input.......8-12
Save............................................................7-18 Description for symbols...............................8-12

Contents
Confirming/Setting the IP address of

Chapter 9 Specifications the sensor................................................... A-31
Specifications.......................................................9-2 Confirming the router settings.................... A-32
Sensor...............................................................9-2 Confirming the firewall settings................... A-32
IV Software.......................................................9-4 Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
Dimensions...........................................................9-5 unavailable................................................. A-33
Sensor...............................................................9-5 Initializing the Network Settings
Optional parts for the sensor.............................9-6 (IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-35
Dome attachment..........................................9-6 Settings after initialization.............................. A-35
Polarizing filter attachment............................9-7 Connecting method after initialization............ A-35
Front cover....................................................9-7 For direct connection.......................... A-35
Mounting adapter...........................................9-7 For network connection...................... A-35
Power I/O cable.............................................9-7 Initializing the network settings...................... A-35
Bracket..........................................................9-8 Maintenance...................................................... A-36
Communication cables......................................9-8 Replacing the front cover............................... A-36
Ethernet cable...............................................9-8 Index.................................................................. A-38
NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable.................9-8
Appendices
Status Table......................................................... A-2
Status table...................................................... A-2
Displaying and outputting the status result...... A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result at
the time of position adjustment........................ A-4
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position
Adjustment Tool................................................... A-5
Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-5
Cut-off process of the matching rate................ A-5
Settings List......................................................... A-6
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen....... A-6
1 Image Optimization................................... A-6
2 Master Registration.................................. A-7
3 Tool Settings............................................. A-7
4 Output Assignment................................. A-10
Program Details screen................................. A-11
I/O Settings screen........................................ A-12
Advanced screen........................................... A-13
Troubleshooting................................................. A-16
Error Messages................................................. A-19
Checking errors by observing
the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor.... A-19
Confirming error messages of
the IV-Navigator............................................. A-21
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected
with the sensor.................................................. A-25
Remedy when direct connection is
unavailable..................................................... A-25
Remedy when connection via
a network is unavailable................................. A-26
Confirming the status by observing
the indicator light of the sensor...................... A-29
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......... A-29
STATUS indicator light................................ A-30
Other methods of confirming a network
connection...................................................... A-31
Confirming the existence of
the sensor from the PC............................... A-31
Confirming/Setting
the IP address of the PC............................. A-31

Contents
MEMO

1
1
This chapter explains the system configurations
and overview of IV Series, how to check package
Getting Started
Getting Started
contents, and the name and function of each part.
System Configuration........................................1-2
Overview of IV Series.........................................1-4
Checking the Package Contents.......................1-8
Name and Function of Each Part....................1-11
- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 1-1

System Configuration
1 Basic configurations of IV-Series

Getting Started
Connecting the PC and single sensor

IV Series
IV Software (IV-Navigator)
IV-H1
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)
Sensor
IV-500C Power I/O cable
IV-500CA (2m/5m/10m)
IV-500M
IV-500MA (Optional)
IV-150M Dome attachment
IV-150MA IV-D10
IV-2000M
Polarizing filter attachment
IV-2000MA
OP-87436/OP-87437
24 VDC power
Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

proximity sensor etc. etc. PLC can control the trigger
Sends the signal to the Alarm can be output input and the status output
trigger input when the by the status output function, and can switch the
target is detected. function. program number.
1-2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Connecting the PC and multiple sensors

1
Getting Started
When the network is connected, the PC that the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software is installed can be
connected by selecting a single sensor from among multiple sensors.
* Each sensor requires the power I/O cable.
* A single PC cannot be connected with multiple sensors at the same time.
IV Software (IV-Navigator)
IV-H1
Ethernet switch
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)

Overview of IV Series
1 IV Series
Getting Started
The IV Series is an all-in-one “Vision Sensor” featuring a camera, a light, and a controller. This sensor
can be attached easily so complicated detection operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a
photoelectric switch can be achieved easily.
Operation conditions settings require the IV Software, IV-Navigator (IV-H1) or the intelligent monitor (IV-
M30). After setting is completed, the sensor can be operated independently.
The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so network connection with
multiple sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)
zz
Direct connection zz
Network connection
Functions of IV-Navigator
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation
screen
yyMonitoring the statistical
information
yyReading the image history
yySimulator
Power I/O
Ethernet switch
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLighting
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image history

Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

1
Getting Started
IV-M30 is the dedicated monitor with a touch panel.
For details of IV-M30, refer to "IV Series User's Manual (Monitor)".
zz
Direct connection zz
Network connection
Functions of monitor
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the
operation screen
Power I/O yyMonitoring the
statistical information
Ethernet
yyReading the image
switch
history
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLighting
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image history

1 Judgment processing flow

Getting Started
This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.
Trigger input
BUSY output
Total status
output
Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the

Trigger input target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC.
Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an
internal trigger function.
Light up the built-in light and image the target by using the
Imaging CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.
According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target

Tool processing is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality.
Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned
positions of the target can be corrected by using the
position adjustment tool.
After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output
function turns OFF.
Outputs the status results.
Status output When the total status result is OK, the total status output is ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG
output is ON.
Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor.

Save images Conditions for saving the image can be selected from
"NG only" or "All".
Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type can
save 300 images.

MEMO
Getting Started

Checking the Package Contents
1 IV Series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are packed
for each model you purchased before using.
Getting Started
Sensor
yyIV-500C yyIV-150M yyIV-500M yyIV-2000M

yyIV-500CA yyIV-150MA yyIV-500MA yyIV-2000MA
Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1
Mounting adapter x 1
Screw for mounting
adapter x 1
Flathead screwdriver x 1
Sensor x 1
(Manual focus type only)
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the Instruction Manual x 1
default factory setting.
“Name and Function of Each Part” (Page 1-11)
“Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)
“Cables” (Page 2-8)
Optional parts for the sensor
Dome attachment
yyIV-D10
Instruction Manual x 1
Mounting screw x 2
Hexagon wrench
Dome attachment × 1 (L-shaped) x 1
“Using
��
the dome attachment” (Page 2-6)
Polarized visible light filter attachment Infrared polarization filter attachment

yyOP-87436 yyOP-87437
Mounting screw x 2 Mounting screw x 2

Instruction Manual x 1 Instruction Manual x 1
Polarized visible light Infrared polarization

filter attachment x 1 filter attachment
“Using the polarizing filter attachment” (Page 2-7) “Using the polarizing filter attachment” (Page 2-7)

Power I/O cable Front cover (for replacement)

1
(M12 12pin - stranded wire)
Getting Started
yyOP-87461
yyOP-87440 (2m)
yyOP-87441 (5m) Mounting screw x 2
yyOP-87442 (10m)
Front cover
(for replacement) x 1
O-shaped ring
(Small x 2, Large x 1)
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1
Mounting adapter Hexagon wrench

yyOP-87460 (L-shaped) x 1
Screw for
the mounting adapter x 1 Optional parts for replacement.
“Replacing the front cover” (Page A-36)
Mounting adapter x 1
Same as accessories for the sensor. Bracket
Optional parts in case of loss/damage. yyOP-87685
Screw for the bracket and
nut x 1
Mounting screw x 4
Bracket A x 1
Bracket B x 1

1 Communication cables
Getting Started
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable

yyOP-87454 (2m) (M12 4pin - RJ-45)
yyOP-87455 (5m) yyOP-87457 (2m)
yyOP-87456 (10m) yyOP-87458 (5m)
yyOP-87459 (10m)
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

(M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1
IV Software
yyIV-H1
Starting Guide x 1
“Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)” (Page 2-14)

CD-ROM × 1

Name and Function of Each Part
Sensor 1 Mounting adapter 1

Use this for mounting and fixing the sensor.
Getting Started

Name and function of each part of the “Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)
sensor 2 Connector for power I/O cable
1 Connector for connecting the power I/O cable.
Use this for supplying the power to the sensor
2
and for connecting with external devices.
3 “Cables” (Page 2-8)
4
3 Focusing position adjustment screw (manual
focus type only)
Adjusts the focus of the displayed image.
5 “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)
4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable

Connector for connecting a monitor cable or
Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the
monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch.
“Cables” (Page 2-8)
When the cable is not connected, attach

the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector
to maintain enclosure rating.
Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m
6
5 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor.
“Operation of the indicator light” (Page 1-12)
7
8 6 Built-in light
LED light that illuminates the target
7 Camera
Images the object.
8 Front cover
Protects the camera and built-in lights.
The front cover is protected by the protection
sheet (blue) in the default factory setting.
Remove the sheet when the sensor is to be
used.
Front cover for replacement is provided for
maintenance.
“Replacing the front cover” (Page A-36)

1
Operation of the indicator light 3 TRIG
Green light lights up (one-shot) according to
Details on operations of the indicator light are
Getting Started
input of the internal or external trigger.

shown below.
4 5 4 STATUS
Indicates the connecting status to the PC.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with PC.
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved
but the sensor is not correctly
connected with PC.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned.
Not correctly connecting with
PC.
1 2 3
yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status
1 PWR/ERR while adjusting the focusing
Indicates the power supplying status to the position with the blinking speed
sensor and the error status of the sensor. (manual focus type only).
yyGreen (ON).......Operating. “Focus adjustment for the
yyGreen (Blink).....Setting processing. Operation manual focusing type” (Page
is stopped. Blinks once a 4-14)
second. Normal connection with the PC is not possible,
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has refer to “Remedy when the PC cannot be
occurred. connected with the sensor” (Page A-25).
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has
occurred. 5 LINK/ACT
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied. Indicates the linking status within PC or
Adjusting the focusing position Ethernet switch.
(manual focus only). yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
For countermeasures when an error occurred, yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data
refer to “Error Messages” (Page A-19). is sending/receiving.
yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen................Comprehensive result is "OK".
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is "NG".
yy(OFF)................Setting processing.
Standby status until the first
judge finishes after starting the
operation or after switching
the program number.
yyOrange (Blink)....Indicates the focusing status
while adjusting the focusing
position with the blinking speed
(manual focus type only).
“Focus adjustment for the
manual focusing type” (Page
4-14)

2
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor,
how to set up the PC, and how to connect the
Installation and cables.
2
Connection
Installation and Connection

Mounting the Sensor..........................................2-2
Cables..................................................................2-8
Setting up the PC..............................................2-14

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the Sensor
Checking the view and installed

yyGround (functional ground) the drain cable distance
2 (FG) of the power I/O cable.
yyMount and insulate the sensor. Use the For IV Series, installed distance between the view
attached mounting adapter to insulate. and target is different depending on the type of the
Sensor case has been grounded. If the sensor sensor. Check the type of the sensor to be used
is not insulated, the electric potential and and its view, and place it in the proper distance.
noises may cause a damage or malfunction.
yyDo not place the sensor in the environment View H
that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance
to the environment, or environment that
propagates the vibration directly to the
sensor. Those may cause a damage or Indicator light View V
malfunction.
Installed distance
yyManual focus type needs to adjust the focusing WD
position after installed. Reserve the enough
View V = View H x 0.75
space to adjust and install it. (H : V = 4 : 3)
yyAt the time of installation, it is better to enable
the position or direction adjustment of the
sensor by installing the adjustment system at
the sensor mounting area. The indicator light of the
yyView and optical axis have individual differences. sensor side is the front
surface of an image.
Adjust the position by checking the actual image
at the time of installation.
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of
other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also,
be careful when the light intensity of the ambient
light changes. Use the shield to protect when the
location cannot be changed.
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out
the internal light or the view of the sensor.
yyDetection may become unstable due to the
lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each
other. Delay the timing of external trigger or use
the shield to avoid interference.

Mounting the Sensor
zz
Standard range type (color/monochrome)
600
2
Installed distance WD (mm)
500

400
300
200
150
100
50
0
25 50 70 100 130 150 200 250
210
View H (mm)
zz
Short range type
150
100
50
0
10 12 20 30 36 40
View H (mm)
zz
Long range type
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
300
0
45 100 200 300 400
View H (mm)
The value of View H and V will be a half of the

value on the figures above when using the digital
zooming function (monochrome type only).

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the sensor Mounting the sensor onto

the mounting adapter
2 Mounting the mounting adapter
Use the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460) 1 Mount the sensor to the left and right
stopper on the mounting adapter.

to mount the sensor.
Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the
indicator light.
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in
the default factory setting. Remove it from the sensor. Indicator light
“Unmounting the sensor” (Page 2-5)

Mounting on the wall
yyScrew : M3 x 4 Push the sensor to the
Use the commercially available screws which stopper of the fixing screw
have head thickness of 3 mm or lower.
yyTightening torque : 1.0 N·m or lower

Mounting from the jig side
yyScrew : M4 x 4 Push until you hear the clicking sound from
the both side stoppers
Use the commercially available screws.
yyTightening torque : 1.5 N·m or lower
2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor using
the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 1
Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 N·m
For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to

“Dimensions” (Page 9-5).
Remove the
protection sheet

Mounting the Sensor
Unmounting the sensor
1 Dismount the screw. 2

2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting
adapter and unmount the sensor.
Pull out the

stopper

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the attachment 2 Fix the dome attachment with attached

dedicated screws.
2 Using the dome attachment

yyScrew : Dedicated screw x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
Dome attachment can be used for the standard

range type and short range type sensor.
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyUse the dome attachment at a correct
installation distance. Failure to do so may lose
the effect of the dome attachment.
yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment
mounted.
“Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-11)
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the dome attachment mounted.
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page
6-42)

Mounting the dome attachment
Installed distance of the dome
attachment
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the 62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor
concave part of the dome attachment with (0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome
the mounting screw of the front cover of attachment)
the sensor.
Sensor type
yyStandard range type
yyShort range type
Installed distance
Screw hole for from the front face of
mounting the the sensor
attachment
Front cover
mounting screw Concave part
62 to 112 mm
Concave part
(0 to 50 mm)
Target

Mounting the Sensor
Using the polarizing filter attachment 2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with
the attached dedicated screws.
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyScrew : M2.5 x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
2
yyThere are the polarized visible light filter

attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared
polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use
the correct polarization filter attachment in
accordance with the illuminant of the sensor
light. Failure to do so may lose the effect.
yyAdjust brightness with the polarization filter
attachment mounted.
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the polarization filter attachment mounted. Remove the protection
sheet (blue)
6-42)
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the

concave part of the polarizing filter
attachment with the mounting screw of
the front cover of the sensor.
Screw hole for

mounting the
attachment
Front cover
mounting screw
Concave part
Concave part

Cables
Cables
Connecting the power I/O cable of 3 Wire each cable according to its intended
the sensor purpose.
2 zz
Selecting NPN output
1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the When NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9)
power I/O cable and pin connection of the External device

cable connector, and connect the cable to Brown (DC24V)
the sensor. Black/White/Gray/
Orange Load
(OUT) IN
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/ DC24V
Green/Red
(IN) OUT
Adjust the pins and the (NPN)

Blue (0V)
pin connection
Drain wire (FG)
yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /

Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) /
Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) /
Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw- Use it by assigning the optional function
to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.
on connector in the clockwise direction.
Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0
zz
Selecting PNP output
to 1.5 N·m.
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-9)
External device
Brown (DC24V)
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/ (PNP)
Green/Red
(IN) OUT
Black/White/Gray/ DC24V
Orange
(OUT) IN
Load
Blue (0V)
When connecting the connector, insert it Drain wire (FG)

without tipping and tighten it well. If the
tightening is weak, vibration can loosen yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /
the connector and cause bad connections. Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
Also, the enclosure rating may not be yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) /
maintained with loose connection. Yellow (IN2) / Light Blue (IN3) /
* Indication is retighten approximately Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
90° to 120° with tools such as pliers
Use it by assigning the optional function
after tightening with hands.
to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

Cables
Wiring Assigning
Name Description
color default value
Brown DC24V - + side of power 2
- side of power

Blue 0V -
GND of input-output cable
Output assignable function
Black OUT1 Total Status (N.O.)
yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
White OUT2 BUSY (N.O.) yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
Gray OUT3 Error (N.O.) yyPos. Adj.
yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4)
Orange OUT4 OFF
yyOFF (not used)
Set external trigger.
Pink IN1 Ext. Trigger Rising
Rising timing (↑) or falling timing (↓) can be set.
Yellow IN2 OFF
Input assignable function
Light Blue IN3 OFF
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Purple IN4 OFF yyClear Error
Green IN5 OFF yyExt. Master Save
yyOFF (not used)
Red IN6 OFF
Drain FG - Insulated frame
Cable specification yyBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25
yyPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28
yyWith braided shield cable (with drain cable)
yyThe output cable assignment can be changed.
“4.
��
Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.
“Output Settings” (Page 6-27)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
“Input Settings” (Page 6-26)
yyIndividually insulate the non-used input-output cables.

yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output). For
contact output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the contact bouncing.

Cables
Specification of the circuit and Output circuit

current of the sensor
2
When the NPN output is selected
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page
Input circuit 3-9), the circuit becomes open collector NPN
output circuit.

No-voltage input yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
(When the NPN output is selected) yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
DC24V
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page
3-9), the circuit becomes no-voltage input Brown
circuit.
Load
Overcurrent protection circuit
External power supply is not necessary.
Main circuit
yyON voltage : 2 V or lower OUT1 - OUT4
yyOFF current : 0.1 mA or lower
*
yyON current : 2 mA (short circuit)
DC24V
+3.3V Brown
0V
Blue
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6 * Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /

Orange (OUT4)
* Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
to OUT4
Blue
0V

When the PNP output is selected
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) / 3-9), the circuit becomes open collector PNP
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6) output circuit.
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6
yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower

Voltage input DC24V
(When the PNP output is selected) Brown

Overcurrent protection circuit
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-9), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit.
Main circuit
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V OUT1 - OUT4

yyON voltage : 15 V or higher *
yyON current : 2 mA (for 24V)
Load
yyOFF current : 0.2 mA or lower

DC24V
0V
Brown
Blue
* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /
Orange (OUT4)
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6 Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1

* to OUT4
0V
Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6

Cables
Connecting the sensor and the PC Connecting via network

Connects the Ethernet cable to the sensor.
Connecting directly Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the 2
Connects the sensor and PC using the Ethernet cable. Ethernet switch.

Connect the PC and Ethernet switch using the
commercially available network cable.
Ethernet switch
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)
For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer

to “Connecting the Ethernet cable” (Page 2-12).
For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer

to “Connecting the Ethernet cable” (Page 2-12).
The sensor does not support PoE (Power

over Ethernet). Supply power using the power
I/O cable.

Cables
Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot
Connecting the Ethernet cable
tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool
This section explains how to connect the Ethernet
2 cable.
such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening
torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces
between connectors are shown below.
1 Align the pin connection parts of the
yyEthernet cable
Ethernet cable connector with three pins
(OP-87454/OP-87455/OP-87456)
of the cable connector, and connect the
cable to the sensor. Tightening torque : 0.6 N·m
Retightening degree : 15 to 30°
Spaces between connectors : 1 mm
(reference value)
yyNFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable
(OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459)
Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 N·m
Retightening degree : 5 to 10°
Align the pins and Spaces between connectors : 0 mm
the pin connection (reference value)
If the connector cable tightening is weak,

vibration may loosen the connector and cause
bad connections or cable disconnections.
Also, the enclosure rating may not be
maintained with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.
2 Tighten the connector by turning the
screw-on connector in the clockwise
direction. When connecting the connector, Check the spaces between the Ethernet cable
insert it without inclination while pushing connector and the cable connector.
in and tighten it well.
(2)
When the screw stops rotating by
Spaces between
the locking mechanism, further
connectors
tighten it while pushing.
(1)
Tighten the screw-on connector

Cables
MEMO

Setting up the PC
Setting up the PC
This section explains how to install/uninstall the IV- Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)
Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software and how to set up
This section describes the procedure for installing
2 the PC.
the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software on the PC.
Required environment for the PC to
be connected yyThis section describes the installation using an

installation example for Windows 7.
To connect the sensor and PC, the environment yyExit or finish all other running software before
which satisfies the following conditions is required. the installation.
Confirm that the PC to be used satisfies the yyLog on with a user who has administrative
following conditions. privileges.
yyIf the user account control screen appears during
OS the installation, click the [Continue] button.
yyIf you have logged on with a user account that does
One of the following OS’s must be pre-installed. not have administrative privileges, input a user account
yyWindows 7..............Home Premium/ with administrative privileges and the password.
Professional/Ultimate
yyWindows XP...........Professional/HomeEdition
Windows 7 supports for 32bit version/64bit version. 1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start
Supported languages : Japanese/English Windows.
Hardware 2 Insert the IV-H1 disc into the media drive.

The installation program activates by the auto
Interface run function of the PC, and the InstallShield
Must be equipped with Ethernet (100 BASE-TX). Wizard screen opens.
Processor If the installation program does not activate,
open the media drive from the Computer and
yyWindows 7..............Needs to be compliant with double-click "setup.exe".
system requirements for OS.
yyWindows XP...........Pentium III or better
Clock speed 1 GHz or faster
3 Follow the instructions in the window.
Memory capacity
yyWindows 7..............Needs to be compliant with
system requirements for OS.
yyWindows XP...........512 MB or more
(1GB or more is recommended)
Monitor
yyResolution : 1024 × 768 pixel or higher
yyDisplay color : High Color (16bit) or higher
HDD free space required for installation
1 GB or more
Operating conditions
4 After the completion window for
.NET Framework 2.0 Service Pack 2 or later must InstallShield Wizard is displayed, click the
have been installed. [Finish] button.
* If this software has not been installed, it will
be automatically installed at the time of IV-H1 5 Remove the installation CD.
installation.

Setting up the PC
Installation destination of the Deleting the software (uninstall)

software (reference) This section describes the procedure for uninstalling
Installation destination of the application software the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) for IV Software. 2
and the PDF User's Manual (default settings) are

as follows. yyThis section explains the uninstallation using an
uninstallation example for Windows 7.
C:\Program Files\KEYENCE\IV-Navigator yyIf the user account control screen appears
Windows 7 64bit version : during the installation in the Windows 7
C:\Program Files (x86)\KEYENCE\IV-Navigator environment, click the [Continue] button.
yyLog on with a user who has administrative
Application privileges.
yyIV-Navigator.exe : IV-Navigator
1 Turn ON the power of the PC and start
Manual Windows.
yyIV_Manual_xx.pdf :.IV Series User's Manual
(PC Software) 2 Select [Control Panel] - [Programs and
Features] from the [Start] menu.
Data saving destination
yyWindows 7 3 Select [IV-Navigator] and click [Uninstall].
Document for the logon user \IV-Navigator
yyWindows XP
My Document for the logon user \IV-Navigator
4 After the confirmation dialog is displayed,

click the [Yes] button.
When the IV-Navigator is removed from the
Programs and Features screen, uninstallation is
completed.

Setting up the PC
Changing the PC settings For Windows XP

(IP address setting)
2 1 Open the Control Panel.
yyLog on with a user who has administrative privileges. 2 Double-click [Network Connections].
yyAuto acquisition of IP address (DHCP server) cannot

be used due to the inability to connect with the sensor. 3 Right-click the [Local Area Connection]
icon and select [Properties] from the
For Windows 7 displayed menu.
1 Open the Control Panel. 4 Select [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and

click the [Properties] button.
2 Click ([Network and Internet]) - [Network
and Sharing Center]. 5 Select [Use the following IP address] and
input the IP address and subnet mask.
3 Click [Change adapter settings] on the
upper left on the screen.
4 Right-click the [Local Area Connection]

icon and select [Properties] from the
displayed menu.
5 Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/

IPv4)] and click the [Properties] button.
6 Select [Use the following IP address] and

input the IP address and Subnet mask.
yyIP address : 192.168.10.1

yySubnet mask : 255.255.255.0
For direct connection, set an arbitrary IP address

(The above is an example). To connect with the
existing network, input the IP address that was
assigned by the network administrator.
yyIP address : 192.168.10.1
yySubnet mask : 255.255.255.0 6 After the setting is completed, click the
[OK] button and close all the windows.
For direct connection, set an arbitrary IP address
(The above is an example). To connect with the
existing network, input the IP address that was
assigned by the network administrator.
7 After the setting is completed, click the

[OK] button and close all the windows.
3
This chapter explains the overview of the IV-Navigator
screen and operation of IV Series, basic operation
Basic Operation flow, and the operation when turning on the power for
the first time.
Also, explains how to reset the sensor to the default
factory setting. 3
Basic Operation
Overview of Screen and Operation...................3-2
Basic Operation Flow.........................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on..........3-5
Resetting to the Factory Default Settings......3-10
Basic Operation for Tools................................3-11

Overview of Screen and Operation
Indicates each screen of the IV-Navigator and overview of the operation.

For details of what can be set on each screen and its operations, see to the applicable references.
Activation Menu screen Program Details

Select the connection method with the sensor or the IV‑simulator. Checks or initializes the program.
3 You can also change the display language.

“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)
“Things can be performed with the program
functions” (Page 6-6)
Basic Operation
Main screen in [Run] Main screen in [Program]

Images and judges based on the judgment Performs the program settings, sensor settings, and
condition. reference of the image history.
“Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]” “Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]”
(Page 5-3) (Page 5-3)
Simulator
The batch backup file (*.iva) is used to confirm or change
the setting contents and confirm the image history.
“Chapter 7 Simulator” (Page 7-1)

Sensor’s internal image history I/O Settings Advanced Sensor Settings

Operates the image history in the sensor. Sets the input/output-related Performs the advanced settings for
“Sensor’s Internal Image History settings for the sensor. the sensor.
(Confirming the Images whose Status
Result is NG)” (Page 6-15)
“Setting the Input and Output
Information of the Sensor” (Page 6-26)
“Setting the Advanced Information
of the Sensor” (Page 6-30) 3
Basic Operation
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup)
Sets the program to be used for judgment.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)”
(Page 4-1)
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold.
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 5-14)
Tool Auto Tuning

Automatically adjusts threshold of tool and extraction
conditions of Color Area/Area tool in accordance with
OK/NG image.
“Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the
Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)

Basic Operation Flow
Basic Operation Flow
Installing, connecting, and wiring the sensor

Mount the sensor, and then connect and wire the cable.
Also, installing the IV-Navigator.
“Chapter 2 Installation and Connection” (Page 2-1)
��
3
Basic Operation
Turning on the power

Turn on the power of the sensor, and then perform the initial start-up setting.
“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)
Settings Navigator
Create the program to be used for operation in the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup).
STEP 1: Setting of image optimization

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.
Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)
��
STEP 2: Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the reference for judgment.
��
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)
STEP 3: Tool setting

Set the tool to judge a target.
Place a tool on the master image and set the thresholds for judgment. Up to 16
detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)
��
STEP 4: Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)
��
Starting the operation/adjustment

Switch the [Program] screen to the [Run] screen, and start the operation. If the setting is
inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning).
“Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting” (Page 5-1)
��

Operation when the Power is Turned on
Operation flow when the power is

turned on
(1) There are two connection methods for
connecting the sensor: Direct Connection and
Turn on the power of the sensor
Network Connection.
“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator 3
(Direct Connection)” (Page 3-6)
Basic Operation
“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-6)
IV-Navigator startup
(2) When the power of the sensor is turned on for
the first time, set the Polarity.
(1) “Operation for initial startup of the sensor”
(Page 3-9)
Direct Connection/Network Connection (2) The main screen in [Program] opens. Set the
activation condition in the Settings Navigator.
After the setting is completed, operation
(2)
begins.
“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Initial startup Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)
(4) (5)
of the sensor
(4) After the second time of starting the sensor, the
(3) operation begins when the power is turned on.
��
Connection failed (5) If the connection has failed, refer to “Remedy
Sensor Setup Run when the PC cannot be connected with the
(Error message)
sensor” (Page A-25).
The sensor can be independently operated.

Operation for initial startup of the yyWhen the sensor is connected with the PC for
the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. Refer
IV-Navigator (Direct Connection)
to “Operation for initial startup of the sensor”
(Page 3-9).
1 Turn on the power of the sensor. yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
3 Turn on the power of the sensor before the
the main screen in [Run] or [Program] opens.
[Direct Connection] button is clicked in step 3.

Basic Operation
yyIf the PC cannot connect with the sensor,

refer to “Remedy when direct connection is
2 Double-click the [IV-Navigator] icon on the unavailable” (Page A-25).
desktop. yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is
automatically set.
yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor
when the PROFINET function is being used,
The Activation Menu screen opens. the PROFINET function will stop. To use the
PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.
3 Click the [Direct Connection] button.
Operation for initial startup of the
IV-Navigator (Network Connection)
Starting the IV-Navigator
yyIf the [Language] is clicked, the Select

1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
language screen opens. Select the arbitrary
Turn on the power of the sensor before the
language so that the language to be
[Network Connection] button is clicked in step 3.
displayed can be switched.
yyTo use the FTP client function or field network,
select the [Network Connection] button.
2 Double-click the [IV-Navigator] icon on the
desktop.
4 Click the [Connect] button.

The Activation Menu screen opens.
3 Click the [Network Connection] button.
If multiple network adapters are installed on

the PC, select the network adapter.
If the [Language] is clicked, the Select

language so that the displayed language can
be switched.

The Network Connection screen opens.

Searching for a sensor to be connected
Automatically searches for a sensor on the network
and connects with it.
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.

yySearching range and retrievable number of units
3
are as follows.
Basic Operation
yySensor with no IP address (default) :
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a
There are two ways to set the sensor to be range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor
connected. For details of procedures, refer to reaches (Page A-35).
each reference. yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
zz
When the sensor on the network is
the local network to which the monitor is
searched
connected.
“Searching for a sensor to be connected”
(Page 3-7)
zz
When the sensor is specified by the IP
address 2 Click the [Search Sensor] button.
“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
address” (Page 3-8)

Searching the sensor begins.
When the searching is finished, the searched

result will be displayed.
If the search results are not displayed, refer to

“When the connection cannot be established
by searching the sensor” (Page A-27).

3 Select the sensor to be connected. Specifying sensor to be connected by

zz
When connecting to the sensor with no IP IP address
address
Used when the IP address of the sensor to be
Click the [Connect] button. connected is defined beforehand.
3 1 Input the IP address of the sensor to be
connected.
Basic Operation
The Network Settings screen opens.

Input the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default
Gateway, and PORT, and then click the
[Connect] button.

2 Click the [Connect] button.
zz
When connecting to the sensor with set IP
address
Click the [Connect] button.
yyWhen the sensor is connected with the PC for

the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. Refer
(Page 3-9).
yyWhen the sensor is connected with the PC for yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. Refer the main screen in [Run] or [Program] opens.
(Page 3-9). If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor,
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, refer to “When the connection cannot be
the main screen in [Run] or [Program] opens. established by specifying the sensor” (Page A-28).

Operation for initial startup of

the sensor
When the monitor is connected to the sensor in
the default setting, the screen to select the polarity
(NPN or PNP) opens.
After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in
3
Basic Operation
Settings Navigator.
For details of the Polarity, refer to “Specification
of the circuit and current of the sensor” (Page 2-10)�.
1 Select the polarity of the sensor and click

the [OK] button.
The main screen in [Program] opens.
2 Click the [Sensor Setup] button and set

up the program.
For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to

“Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1).

Resetting to the Factory Default Settings
Initializing the sensor 3 Click the [OK] button.

Initializes information set in the sensor and uses
factory default setting.
3 yyThe following settings will not be initialized.

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28)
Basic Operation
yyNetwork settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask /

The confirmation dialog appears.
Default Gateway / PORT (TCP)) (Page 6-32)
yyTo initialize the registered programs individually,
refer to “Initializing a program” (Page 6-14).
4 Click the [Yes] button.
1 Switch the IV-Navigator to the main screen

in [Program] and click the [Advanced]
button. Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,
the initialization completion screen opens.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens.

The system returns to the Advanced Sensor
2 Select the [Initialize/Update] tab and click Settings screen.
the [Initialize Sensor] button.

Basic Operation for Tools
Basic Operation for Tools
Operating the image tool bar (4) Tool Display Options

Switches the display method for the detection
This section explains the operation method for tool to be displayed on the image display screen.
image tool bar displayed at the upper part of the “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)
image display screen for the IV-Navigator by using
(5) [Manual Trigger] / [Trigger ON] button
an example of the main screen in [Run].
Displayed if the external trigger is being set. 3
Use this button when the external trigger cannot
Basic Operation
be output. This button is not displayed on the
simulator screen.
Image display yy[Manual Trigger] button
screen
Displayed during the [Run] mode. Outputs the
trigger once in each click of the button.
yy[Trigger ON] button
Displayed during the [Program] mode.
Switches the continuous trigger to ON/OFF in
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) each click of the button.
(1) [Zoom In] / [Zoom Out] button (6) [Save Image] button
In each time of clicking the button, magnifies/reduces Individually saves the image displayed on the IV-
the displayed image on the image display screen. Navigator into the PC. The ivp format file which
Displayable zooming rates are as follows. can be used for master image registration or Tool
100% / 125% / 150% / 200% / 300% / 500% Auto Tuning will also be saved at the same time.
The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at
If an entire image cannot be displayed, the the same time (screenshot).
zooming rate currently displayed will be “Saving images and screens displayed on the
displayed at the lower right of the screen. IV-Navigator individually” (Page 6-22)
(7) [Show saved image file location] button
Opens the folder which saves an image when
Entire image the [Save Image] button is clicked.
By clicking the ▼ button and selecting the
[Change saved image file location], the saving
destination of an image can be changed.
Enlarged area currently

displayed
(2) [Fit to Window] button

Makes the display size of the displayed image fit
with the window size.
(3) Display Magnification
Displays the display magnification of the
displayed image on the image display screen.

Editing the tool window zz

Changing the size of the tool window
By moving the mouse cursor onto either side
The tool window displayed when the tool is set in
of the tool window, the mouse cursor changes
the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or
to or .
direction.
The height or width of the tool window can be
3 This section explains how to edit the tool window
using an example of [Outline] tool. changed by dragging it.
Basic Operation
1 In the tool settings of the Settings

Navigator, click the [Add Tool] button and
click the [Outline] button.
The tool window of an outline tool will be displayed.
By moving the mouse cursor onto either corner

of the tool window except the upper right corner,
Window
the mouse cursor changes to . The size of
Shape
the tool window can be changed by dragging it.
Tool
window
2 Set the tool window of an outline tool.

zz
Selecting the shape of the tool window
When [Circle] is selected in the window shape
On the screen to set the outline tool, the screen settings, the size of the circle can be changed
to select the shape of the tool window opens by by dragging the outline of the circle.
clicking the [Window Shape] button.
The [Rect] or [Circle] can be selected.
Rect Circle
zz
Changing the direction of the tool window
By dragging the arrow mark on the upper right
of the tool window, the direction of the tool
zz
Moving the tool window
window can be changed.
By moving the mouse cursor onto the tool window,
Also, the direction can be reset by the [Angle
the mouse cursor changes to . Drag the cursor
Reset] button.
to move the tool window.

4
This chapter explains the functions and operations
of the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup).
Settings Navigator
(Setting the Judgment Condition)
Settings Navigator..............................................4-2
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator......4-3
1. Image Optimization
(Clearly Image a Target).....................................4-6
2. Master Registration (Registering
an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)....4-20
3. Tool Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)...4-28
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for
Outputting to Output Line)..............................4-60

Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup), the setting items of the program required for judging the target
with the sensor are set in each step. Set the menus by sequentially proceeding the steps using the
navigation button.
Menus
4
Navigation button
Flow in the Settings Navigator
STEP 1 Image Optimization settings

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.
Set the trigger option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)
STEP 2 Master Registration

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference for
Judgment)” (Page 4-20)
STEP 3 Tool Settings

Set the tool to judge a target.
Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to
16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)
STEP 4 Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)”
(Page 4-60)

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Starting the Settings Navigator 5 Click the [Sensor Setup] button.

2 Start the IV-Navigator.
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-6) The startup screen of the Settings Navigator 4
opens.

When the sensor is in the following condition,
the main screen in [Program] opens. Proceed 6 Perform the following operation.
to step 5. zz
When the program which has not been set
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time in step 5 is selected
yyIf all programs are not being set Start setting [1. Image Optimization].
yyIf the sensor is being setting up
1. Image
Optimization
3 Click the [Program] button. settings
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a

Target)” (Page 4-6)
The confirmation dialog appears. zz

When the program which has been set in
step 5 is selected
4 Click the [OK] button. Click the shortcut button for each step to start
setting.
Shortcut button
IV-Navigator switches to [Program].
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a

Target)” (Page 4-6)
“2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image to be a Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-20)
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for
Targets)” (Page 4-28)
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for
Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the contents which can set on each setting screen and its operations, refer to the applicable
references.
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly
4 Image a Target)” (Page 4-6)
A 2. Master Registration
“2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image to be
a Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-20)
3. Tool Settings
“3. Tool Settings (Setting
the Judgment Method for
4. Output Assignment
“4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details for Outputting
to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

Finishing the Settings Navigator Finishing without completing the steps

This section explains the procedure to finish the
Settings Navigator. 1 Click the [Exit Setup] button at the lower
right of the screen.
Finishing by completing all steps
1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.

4
2 Click the [Complete] button at the lower

right of the [Output Assignment] screen.
zz
When the required settings are completed
The confirmation dialog to save appears.
zz
When the required settings are not
completed
The confirmation dialog to finish appears.
yyBy clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation
When the program setting has been changed,
dialog to save appears.
the confirmation dialog to save appears.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system
3 Click the [Yes] button. returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be
saved into the program, and the system returns Required settings are not completed yet.
to the main screen in [Program]. Even if the [OK] button is clicked, the proper
operation cannot be performed.
yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation

dialog to cancel the settings appears. By 2 Click the [Yes] button.
clicking the [OK] button, the screen closes The settings in the Settings Navigator will be
without saving the settings. saved into the program, and the system returns
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system to the main screen in [Program].
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
yyBy clicking the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
clicking the [OK] button, the screen closes
without saving the settings.
yyBy clicking the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

1. Image Optimization 2. Master Registration 3. Tool Settings 4. Output Assignment
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)
Setting the Image Optimization

In this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining
differences in high and low-quality-targets.
zz
Trigger Options
A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
4 image a target at any timing and can image continuously.

“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
“Checking
��
the view and installed distance” (Page 2-2)
zz
Brightness Adjustment
The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using
the CMOS image sensor.
In the Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically
adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface condition (color,
shininess, material).
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
zz
Focus Adjustment
Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Auto focus can adjust the
focusing position automatically.
“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-13)

Trigger Options Brightness Adjustment Focus Adjustment Extended Functions
Main screen for the Image Optimization

Explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1)
(2)
(3) (6)
(4)

(5)
(7)
(8) (9)
(1) Title (6) Settings button

Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and Displays the settings to be set in the Image
program name (Page 6-12). Optimization.
(2) Shortcut button “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
Displays the shortcut button to each step. “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
(3) [Image type] display “Extended Functions for the Image
Displays the image type. Optimization” (Page 4-16)
yyLive...................Displays an image taken by
the currently imaging sensor. (7) Edit settings screen
Displays the settings to be edited of the
(4) Image tool bar selected item using the settings button in the
Displays the tools for operating the image taken tab format.
by the sensor.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11) (8) [Next to STEP2] button
Proceeds to "2. Master Registration".
(5) Image by the sensor “2. Master Registration (Registering an
Displays an image taken by the sensor. Image to be a Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-20)
(9) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)

Setting the Trigger Options

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.
Settings for the Trigger Options
4 Items Description Setting range

Default
value
yyInternal Trigger
Starts imaging continuously within
the time interval specified in the
trigger interval setting.
yyExternal Trigger
Trigger Options Select the type of the timing to Starts imaging with the external Internal
(Trigger type) start imaging. trigger synchronized with the Trigger
target's motion from a photoelectric
sensor or PLC installed outside.
The time (trigger delay) between
inputting the trigger until imaging
starts can be set.
Set when [Internal Trigger] is
selected in the trigger type
Trigger Interval setting. 1 to 10,000 ms 50 ms
Set an interval (cycle) to
automatically start imaging.
Set when the [External Trigger]
is selected in the trigger type
setting.
Used when the output timing
Trigger Delay of the sensor for the trigger 0 to 1,000 ms 0 ms
occurrence and the imaging
timing of this device. This
device starts imaging after the
time set in the trigger delay of
the trigger input passes.

zz
Internal trigger
Trigger interval Trigger interval

(1)
Internal trigger
(2)
Imaging/
internal processing 4
(3)

Status output
(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings.
(2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.
zz
External trigger
Trigger delay
(1)
External trigger
(2)
Imaging/
internal processing
(3)
Status output
(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing.

When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period.
(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.

Setting the Trigger Options 5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.
zz
When the [Internal Trigger] is selected in
1 Start the Settings Navigator. step 4
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3) Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to
10,000 ms.
2 Display the main screen for the Image
Optimization.
4 “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow”

(Page 4-4)
3 Click the [Trigger Options] button.
The screen to edit the Trigger Options settings opens.

If the internal trigger time is shorter than the
4 Select the trigger type. processing time (Page 5-37), a trigger error
occurs.
Select [Internal Trigger] or [External Trigger].
“Internal trigger” (Page 8-3)
“Error Messages” (Page A-19)
zz
When the [External Trigger] is selected in
step 4
Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to
1000 ms.

Brightness Adjustment
In the automatic brightness adjustment, the target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure time, and an imaging mode according to the shape
and surface condition (color, shininess, material).
Brightness Adjustment settings
Items Description Setting range

Default
value
4

Automatically adjusts the
[Automatic
light intensity and shutter
Brightness
speed according to the shape - -
Adjustment]
and surface condition (color,
button
shininess, material).
yyNormal
This mode is the basic imaging mode.
The target can be imaged with less
noise.
yyHDR
Select to image a target such as a
Select an imaging mode of the
Imaging Mode metal which reflects a light and has a Normal
sensor.
high contrast.
yyHigh Gain
Select it to shorten the exposure time
and when the imaging environment is
in a dark place. Lowers the imaging
quality due to high gain.
Displays a current exposure
Exposure Time - -
time.
Standard range type
1 to 100
(color)
Standard range type
Sets brightness of an image 1 to 120
Brightness (monochrome) 20
manually.
Short range type 1 to 120
Long rang type 1 to 100

Resets the image taken by
[Undo] button the sensor to the state before - -
brightness was adjusted.

Adjusting brightness 4 Adjust brightness.

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Optimization.
4 “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow”

(Page 4-4)
3 Click the [Brightness Adjustment] button.
zz
When brightness is to be adjusted
The screen to edit the Brightness Adjustment automatically
settings opens. Click the [Automatic Brightness Adjustment]
button.
When a brightness adjustment is completed, the
adjusted image will be displayed for the image
taken by the sensor.
zz
When brightness is to be adjusted
manually
Adjust brightness by selecting the imaging
mode and sliding the slider.
Depends on the combination of an imaging
mode and a slider position, the image taken by
the sensor switches to the adjusted image.
The position of the slider can be moved by
inputting the values or clicking the [▲]/[▼] button.
yyThe result of the brightness adjustment will be

displayed in the exposure time.
yyDuring the automatic brightness adjustment,
the sensor automatically images a target by
inputting the internal trigger regardless of the
Trigger Options settings.
yyDo not move a target during the automatic
brightness adjustment. The focus may not be
adjusted correctly.

Focus Adjustment Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type

Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the
shape of a target. 1 Start the Settings Navigator.
Adjusting the methods differ depending on the type “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
of the sensor connected (manual focusing type/
auto focusing type).
Optimization.
zz
Auto focusing type
Adjusts the focusing position manually or
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow”
(Page 4-4)
4
automatically.

yyFor manual adjustment 3 Click the [Focus Adjustment] button.
Adjust the focus by the slider.
yyFor automatic adjustment
The sensor automatically detects the position
that can be focused by clicking the [Automatic
Focus Adjustment] button. The focusing
position can be adjusted by operating the slider
after automatically adjusted.
When the sensor detects multiple matching The screen to edit the Focus Adjustment settings opens.
positions for the focusing position, the optional
positions are marked on the slider. Select If the auto focus adjustment position (Page 6-35)
the focus position from the detected optional is set to [Common], the screen to recommend
positions. the re-registration of the master image for other
programs opens.
zz
Manual focusing type
Turn the focus adjustment screw using the
attached flathead screwdriver to adjust the
4 Adjust the focusing position.
focusing position.
zz
When the focusing position is to be
adjusted automatically
Click the [Automatic Focus Adjustment] button.
yyPlace a target at the appropriate position.
“Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)
yyDo not move a target during the focus
adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted
correctly.
When the focus adjustment is completed, the

adjusted image will be displayed for the image
taken by the sensor.

zz
When the focusing position is to be
adjusted manually yyDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor
Adjust the focusing position by the slider. automatically images a target by inputting the
internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options
settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous
lighting (Page 4-19) is set, the sensor images
with the flash lighting.
yyThe auto adjustment searches the positions that
4 can be focused over the entire area regardless
of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).
Focus adjustment for the manual

focusing type

zz
When multiple focusing positions exist
When there are multiple positions that can be 2 Display the main screen for the Image
focused, the following screen opens. Optimization.
(Page 4-4)
3 Click the [Focus Adjustment] button.
By clicking the [OK] button, the focus is adjusted

to the closest position to the sensor, and the
options of the positions that can be focused are
indicated by ( ).
To change the focusing position to an optional position,
click the options ( ) of the focusing positions.
4 Image the target.
If the target is to be imaged using an external
trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, click the
button (Page 3-11) to image the
target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.
When the button is clicked again,
the imaging with an internal trigger finishes.

5 Turn the focus adjustment screw of

the sensor with the attached flathead When the focus cannot be adjusted by watching
screwdriver, and adjust the focus until the the focus indicator on the PC, you can check
focus value reaches the peak mark. with the blinking cycle of the STATUS and OUT
of the indicator light.
yyQuickly blinks....Focused.
yySlowly blinks.....Not focused. Adjusts to the
most blinking position.
STATUS indicator light 4

OUT indicator light
The focus indicator indicates the positions that

can be focused over the entire area regardless of
the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).
Peak mark
Bar gauge
The peak mark is displayed on the position

where the focus is at the maximum. Turn the
focus adjustment screw to make the bar gauge
on the peak mark position.
By clicking the [Peak Clear] button, the peak
mark will be hidden, and the current focusing
value will be updated as a maximum value.

Extended Functions for the Image Optimization

Adjusts the Image Optimization in the extended functions.
Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization
Default
value
4 yyEntire
Sets the imaging area (image Sets the field of view of the imaging
size of the sensor). When the area for the sensor to the entire area.
Imaging
imaging area is reduced, the yyPartial Entire
Area
shutter speed and judging Edit a tool window and set an
process become faster. arbitrary area in the sensor's field
of view as a imaging area.
Imaging Switches digital zoom ON/OFF.
Area Images by magnifying the center
Digital field two times. The field of view
OFF/ON OFF
Zoom of horizontal and vertical sides
will be a half size.
(Monochrome type only)
Resets the sensor condition to
[Undo]
the condition before the settings - -
button
were changed.
Applies the color filters if the
outline of a certain color cannot
be displayed when the image Unused / Red / Green / Blue /
Color Filters Unused
is displayed in monochrome by Cyan / Magenta / Yellow
color type sensor.
(Color type only)
yyON
Select ON/OFF for the built-in Turns ON built-in light.
Lighting ON
light. yyOFF
Turns OFF built-in light.
yyFlash
Lighting The built-in light lights within
an exposure time at the time of
Lighting Select a lighting mode for the imaging.
Flash
Mode built-in light. yyContinuous
The built-in light lights continuously
regardless of a specified exposure
time when imaging a target.

Imaging Area
yyIf the tool has been set, a rectangular
1 Start the Settings Navigator. area containing tool windows of all tools
which have been set will be displayed as
[Active Range]. The imaging area cannot
be set smaller than the active range. To
2 Display the main screen for the Image narrow down the imaging area, change
Optimization.
the placement of the tool windows before
“Settings Navigator screen and operation
flow” (Page 4-4)
adjusting the imaging area.
yySet a range including the center of the field
4
of the view when trapezoidal correction

3 Click the [Extended Functions] button. (Page 6-40) is to be performed. A region
that cannot be exposed is created in the
exposure range.
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to

“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12).
yyWhen an imaging area is specified, outside
of specified area will be displayed in black.
The screen to edit the extended functions
settings opens.
4 Select the [Imaging Area] tab and select a

type of the imaging area.
If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.
Imaging area

Digital Zoom (monochrome type only) Color filters (color type only)
1 Start the Settings Navigator. This is disabled for the Color Area tool.
2 Display the main screen for the Image 1 Start the Settings Navigator.
Optimization. “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” 2 Display the main screen for the Image
4 (Page 4-4) Optimization.
3 Click the [Extended Functions] button. “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page 4-4)
3 Click the [Extended Functions] button.

settings opens.
4 Select the [Imaging Area] tab and set the settings opens.
digital zoom to OFF/ON. 4 Select the [Color Filters] tab.
The image changes to monochrome. In this example,
the outline in red and blue will be undefined.
5 Select the color to apply the color filter.

Select the filter of the color or complementary
color to be detected (select red here).
By applying the color filter of the selected color,
the red color becomes brighter and the outline
among the blue color will be clarified.
Clarified outline

Lighting


Optimization.
(Page 4-4)
4

3 Click the [Extended Functions] button.

settings opens.
4 Select the [Lighting] tab and set the

Lighting and Lighting Mode.
yyWhen the lighting mode has been changed,

re-register the master image and re-set the
tool. Otherwise correct judgment may not be
possible.
yyWhen [Continuous] has been selected, the
light goes off for approximately 0.3 ms right
before imaging.

2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)
Registers a master image to be a reference for judgment.
Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the Master Registration.
(1)
(2)
4 (3)
(4) (6)
(5)
(7) (8) (9)
(1) Title (6) Edit settings screen

Displays a program number (Page 6-11) and a Displays the settings for the Master Registration
program name (Page 6-12). in the tab format.
(2) Shortcut button “Registering the Live image as a master
Displays the shortcut button to each step. image” (Page 4-21)
“Master registration from the image history
(3) [Image type] display in the sensor” (Page 4-22)
Displays an image type. “Master registration using the file saved in
yyMaster...............Displays a master image (still the PC” (Page 4-23)
image). “Extended Functions for the Master
yyLive...................Displays an image taken by Registration” (Page 4-25)
the currently imaging sensor.
(7) [Back] button
yyTest...................Indicates that the IV-Navigator
is in the Test mode. Returns to the settings screen for the Image
Optimization.
(4) Image tool bar “1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a
Displays the tools for operating the image taken Target)” (Page 4-6)
by the sensor.
Proceeds to "3. Tool settings".
(5) Image by the sensor “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment
Displays an image taken by the sensor. The Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28)
image type to be displayed will be different
depending on the settings screen. (9) [Exit Setup] button
Exits the Settings Navigator.
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page
4-5)

Register Live image as master Register image of the image history Register image of the file Extended functions
Registering the master image 6 Click the [Register the image] button.
Registering the Live image as a master
image
Registers an image taken by the sensor as a
master image.
1 Start the Settings Navigator. 4


2 Display the main screen for the Master
Registration.
(Page 4-4) The “The master image has been registered.”
message appears.
3 Place a target of the high-quality-target
to be the reference for judgment on the 7 Click the [OK] button.
imaging position. The system returns to the main screen for the
Master Registration.
4 Click the [Register Live image as master]
button.
Settings for erasing outline (Page 4-38, Page 4-58)

will be initialized. Set the settings again as needed.
5 Images the target.

trigger, input the external trigger.
button (Page 3-11) to image the
target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.

Master registration from the image 4 Select the image to be registered as a

mater image and click the [OK] button.
history in the sensor
Select the
Registers an image of the image history in the image
memory of the sensor as a master image.
To perform a master image registration from the

image history in sensor, the image to be registered as
4 a master image in the image history must be saved.
“Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-15) For details of how to operate the screen,
refer to “Loading and confirming the saved

images” (Page 6-17).
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3) The confirmation dialog for master image
registration appears.
Registration. 5 Check the displayed image and click the
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” [Registration] button.
(Page 4-4)
If the imaging area of the loaded image is
3 Click the [Register image from image different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
history] button.
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.
The “The master image has been registered.”

message appears.
The Sensor’s internal image history screen
opens. 6 Click the [OK] button.
The new master image is registered, and the
system returns to the main screen for the

Master registration using the file saved 4 Select [IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp)] or
[IV Series Batch Backup File (*.iva)] in the
in the PC
File of type.
Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture
file (*.ivp) stored in the PC, and register as a master
image.
yySave the image to be registered as a master

image into any PC in advance. 4
yyThe files which can be registered as a master

image are batch backup files (*.iva) and the IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp) or
image capture files (*.ivp). IV Series Batch Backup File (*.iva)
“Folder composition and file naming rules” (Page 6-25)
5 Select a file to be registered as a master
image and click the [Open] button.

When using batch backup files (*.iva)


Registration.
The Image type selection screen opens.
(Page 4-4)
3 Click the [Register image from file 6 Select an image type and click the [OK]
button.
location] button.
Select from the image history or master image
saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).
The image list for the selected image type

opens.
7 Select an image to be registered as a mater

image and click the [OK] button.
The screen to select the file opens.
Select the
image
The confirmation dialog for master image


8 Check the displayed image and click the

When using image capture files (*.ivp)
[Registration] button.
If the imaging area of the loaded image is “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
Registration.
4 (Page 4-4)
3 Click the [Register image from file location]

button.

message appears.

The new master image is registered, and the
system returns to the main screen for the
The [Open] screen opens.
4 Select [IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp)] or

[IV Series Image Capture File (*.ivp)] in the
File of type.
IV Series Image File (*.iva;*.ivp) or

IV Series Image Capture File (*.ivp)
5 Select a file to be registered as a master

image and click the [Open] button.
The confirmation dialog for master image


6 Check the displayed image and click the Extended Functions for the Master
[Registration] button. Registration
If the imaging area of the loaded image is

different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
Items of extended functions for the
area that has not been imaged is registered, Master Registration
zz
Brightness Correction
By setting a reference of brightness to the 4
master image, effect of variation of brightness

can be reduced.
yyBrightness correction can be set when the

master image is registered.
yyFor the Color Area tool of the color type,
brightness correction will be disabled.
message appears.
Brightness Correction
The new master image is registered, and the 1 Start the Settings Navigator.
system returns to the main screen for the “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-3)
Registration.
(Page 4-4)
3 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and

click the [Settings] button.
zz
For color type

zz
For monochrome type 5 Click the [Test] button.
*
Screen for the color
type
4
If brightness in the specified region is changed

4 Set the tool window to be a reference of using the masking shield, check that brightness
brightness correction and click the [OK] of the entire image is corrected.
button.
6 Click the [Before Corr.]/[After Corr.]
and check the operation status before
Region to be
the brightness brightness correction and status after
correction brightness correction.
reference
For the region to be a reference of brightness

correction, specify the following.
yyA region with average medium brightness.
A region with strong shininess and reflection
and a region with no shininess and reflection
may not be corrected properly.
yyA region with a constant imaging status
which does not change such as device parts
The system returns to the settings screen for
other than the target’s.
brightness correction.
For details of editing the tool window, refer to

yyWhen brightness correction is not to be used, click
“Editing
��
the tool window” (Page 3-12)�. the [Delete] button on the screen in step 3.
yyBrightness correction corrects brightness of the entire
image to make the average brightness in the tool
window to be a reference of brightness correction the
same as brightness of a master image.

4
4-27
- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -
MEMO
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)
In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target Types of tools
is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the
master image. zz
Outline tool
The aspects of a target registered as a master A detection tool to calculate the matching rate
image are set as a high-quality-target. During an for the target to be examined based on the
operation, the sensor judges whether it is a high- outline information of a registered high-quality-
quality-target or low-quality-target by judging the target.
differences in the registered high-quality-target and
4 a target to be examined.
Judges whether a target is a high or low-quality-
target by setting threshold to the matching rate.
Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to “Outline tool” (Page 4-34)
1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools

Tool settings
can judge a target at the same time.
Master image Outline extraction processing
Selecting a tool according to its

intended purpose
Select a tool according to the purpose of an
Processing and judgment during an operation
examination.
Internal processing <Judge is OK>
Detection tool to be used
Purposes Color Area/
Outline tool
Area tool
To detect the surface/

rear face of parts
Searches a target which has the outline of same
To detect the shapes as an outline of a high-quality-target.
-
orientation of parts Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.
To detect mixture of Example when the result was NG

parts with different - No same shapes exist Different shape
shapes (Detection of existence) (Shape detection)
To detect assembly

deficiencies of parts
To detect processing

defects of parts
To detect differences Different direction
-
in sizes (areas) (Detection of direction)
To detect mixture of
-
different colors
The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100.

100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases in accordance with
the number of non-matched parts.

zz
Color Area/Area tool zz
Position Adjustment tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate in the area A tool to correct the differences in position
(number of pixels) of a target to be examined as (position gap) of a target to be examined. The
the basis (100 %) of the area (number of pixels) position adjustment is used with other detection
of a registered high-quality-target. This judges
whether a target is a high or low-quality-product tools.
by setting the threshold to the matching rate. “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)
If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color
Area tool. The system judges by the area with an Tool settings
arbitrary specified color. Master image 4
If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will

be the Area tool. The system judges by the area
with an arbitrary specified brightness.
“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42)
Tool settings
Color extraction process
(Color type) Tool window
Brightness extraction process Position adjustment window
Master image (Monochrome type)
Processing during an operation
Position adjustment process
Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK>
Tool window
Position adjustment window
Search region of the tool window
Compares the area of a target as defining an area of

high-quality-target to 100 %.
Example when the judgment was NG
Area is narrow Area is wide
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100

(default). 100 indicates that an area is
completely matched. The matching rate
decreases as the area of a target narrows.
yyThe setting range of the display range and
threshold for matching rate can be changed to
0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged
by setting the threshold to the upper limit.
“Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-48)

Main screen for the Tool settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1)
(2) (6)
(3)
(4)
4 (7)
(5)
(8) (9) (10)
(1) Title (6) Tool settings button

Displays a program number (Page 6-11) and a Adds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool.
program name (Page 6-12). “Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool”
(2) Shortcut button (Page 4-31)
Displays the shortcut button to each step. (7) Tool list
(3) [Image Type] display Displays a list of tools set in the program and a
Displays an image type. threshold of each tool.
yyMaster...............Displays a master image (still (8) [Back] button
image). The system returns to the Master Registration
yyLive...................Displays an image taken by screen.
the currently imaging sensor. “2. Master Registration (Registering an
yyTest...................Indicates that the IV-Navigator Image to be a Reference for Judgment)”
is in the Test mode. (Page 4-20)
(4) Image tool bar (9) [Next to STEP4] button
Displays the tools for operating the image taken Proceeds to output assignment.
by the sensor. “4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11) Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)
(5) Master image (10) [Exit Setup] button
Displays a master image and a tool window. If Exits the Settings Navigator.
a search region is set, the tool window which “Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)
indicates the search region (light blue) will be
displayed.
By clicking the tool window, the selected tool
can be switched.

Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a 3 Click the [OK] button.

tool
Adding a tool
Newly sets a tool.
1 Click the [Add Tool] button.

4 Set setting items for each tool. 4
“Outline tool” (Page 4-34)

“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)
Editing a tool
Edits the settings of a tool which has already been
set.
yyIf no tools are set, only the [Add Tool] button
can be clicked. 1 Select a tool to edit the settings.
yyIf one or more tools are added in one program,
the [Edit], [Copy], or [Delete] buttons can be
clicked.
2 Select the tool to be added and click the

[OK] button.
2 Click the [Edit] button.
Tools can also be edited by double-clicking the

The message dialog to add tools appears.
tool in the tool list.
The [ColorArea] tool for the color type and the

[Area] tool for the monochrome type will be
3 Edit setting items for each tool.
displayed.
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)

Copying a tool 4 Click the [Edit] button and set the copied
tool.
Copies a tool which has been set and pastes it to a
same position. This is for the Outline tool and Color
Area/Area tool. This section explains using example
of the Outline tool.
1 Select a tool to be copied. Deleting a tool

4 Deletes an unnecessary tool.
Select the copy
1 Select a tool to be deleted.
source tool.
2 Click the [Copy] button.
2 Click the [Delete] button.
If 16 tools have been set, tools cannot be copied.

The selected tool will be deleted and returns to
the main screen for the Tool settings.
The copied tool window with the selected status

will be displayed on the copy source tool window.
Button of the
copied tool
Copied tool
A tool number which has not been set will be

automatically assigned to the copy destination
tool number.

4
4-33
MEMO
Outline tool Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool
Outline tool
Setting items for the Outline tool

Items Description Setting range Default value
yyRect
Specify with rectangle window. The arbitrary
Selects the window shape
Window size, position, and angle can be specified.
4
to specify an area of the Rect
Shape yyCircle
target to be detected.
Specify with circle window. An arbitrary
size and position can be specified.
Edit Window
When the window shape

Angle
is set to [Rect], resets the - -
Reset
angle of the window.
Specifies an area to yyEntire Entire

search the outline of a Specifies the entire imaging area as a (Without position
Search target. By specifying the search region. adjustment)
Region smaller area as a search yyPartial Partial
region, the processing Specifies a search region to an arbitrary (With position
time will be shortened. size in the imaging area. adjustment)
yyHigh Sensitivity
Extracts an outline of the image with low
contrast. Used when an outline you wish
The extraction sensitivity to detect cannot be extracted.
of an outline can be yyNormal Sensitivity Normal
Sensitivity
selected according to the Extracts the standard outline. Sensitivity
target. yyLow Sensitivity
Reduces the extracted volume of an
Fine Tune Outline
outline. Reduces the extracted volume of

an outline that is necessary to detect.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
You can undo back to 20 operations before.
Judges by disabling an
yyRedo
unnecessary outline which
Returns to the state before clicking the
Remove interrupts the stabilized
[Undo] button. -
Outline detection. Specifies by
yyClear
tracing an extracted
Initializes all the disabling processes.
outline.
yySize
Select the size (size of the mouse cursor) for
when specifying the unnecessary outlines.
Adjusts a threshold
Limit Adjustment
Match (matching rate*) used in 0 to 100 70

an OK/NG judgment.
Changes to the Test
Live mode, and a threshold can
- -
Adjustment be adjusted to the best
threshold while running.
* 100 indicates that outline is completely matched.
Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of unmatched parts.

Setting the Outline tool 6 Set the position, size, and angle of the
tool window in accordance with the target.

2 Display the main screen for the Tool Set the tool
window
settings.
(Page 4-4)
4

3 Add the Outline tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-31)
The main screen for outline tool settings opens. yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to
“Editing
��
the tool window” (Page 3-12)�.
4 Select the shape of tool window. yyThe window angle can be reset by the [Angle
Reset].
7 Set a sensitivity and disable the outline

settings as needed.
Rect Circle
“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37)

“Default value” (Page 4-61)
5 Set a search region as needed.
8 Click the [Live Adjustment] button.
“Setting a search region” (Page 4-37)
The sensor turns to Test mode.

9 Image a high-quality-target and 11 After the setting is completed, click the

low-quality-target. [OK] button.
If the target is to be imaged using the external The system returns to the main screen for the
trigger, input the external trigger. Outline tool settings.
button (Page 3-11) to image the 12 Set a tool name as needed.
target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. “Setting a tool name” (Page 4-38)
4 the imaging with an internal trigger finishes. 13 Click the [OK] button.
10 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection
by checking the matching rate.

<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is higher
than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-quality-
target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65 which
is an intermediate value between 40 and 90. The system returns to the main screen for the
Tool settings.
Threshold Matching rate
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching

rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyAccording to the status result of the tool, the
display color of the tool changes.
“Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed using the
slider or the [+]/[-] button.
yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit
Adjustment] of the main screen in [Program].
yyFor details of the matching rate, refer to
“Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool” (Page A-5).


Setting a search region
Setting a sensitivity
When a range of the search region is to be According to the target, perform the following
specified, perform the following procedures. procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
outline is selected.
1 Select [Partial].
1 Select the extraction sensitivity of the
outline from the pull-down menu of the
[Sensitivity]
4
The outline

which cannot be
extracted
The editing screen for a search region opens.
2 Set the tool window indicates the search

region.
Select [High Sensitivity] in this section.
2 Confirm an outline extracting condition

which changes according to the
Search [Sensitivity].
region
Extracted
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to outline
“Editing
��
yyThe search region cannot be rotated.


Settings for removing outlines
Setting a tool name
Perform the following procedures to delete an An arbitrary name such as a name of target can be
unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window. set to tools (up to 8 characters).
A tool name can be confirmed in the main screen in
1 Click the [Remove Outline] button. [Run].
4 1 Input any name into the text box.

2 Specify an outline which detection is not

needed by dragging with the mouse.
The specified outline changes from green to yellow.
If the display language (Page 6-49) is
Mouse cursor changed, characters might get garbled.
(Eraser)
The removing outline

extraction part (yellow)
yyThe size of mouse cursor for when specifying the

unnecessary outlines can be changed in [Size].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 20 times.

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the
Outline tool settings.
Outline tool > Extended Functions Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool
Extended Functions for the Outline tool

Default
value
Sets a range of the rotating direction to search
an outline of the target.
The system judges NG if an angle of the target
exceeds its rotation range even if the target is
the same shape.
Rotation
Range
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too wide, 0 to ±180°
the acceptable range of variations of angles (Unit: ±1°)
±20° 4
when a target is placed can be increased.

yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too
narrow, the processing time can be shorten.
yyThis can be used for judging the direction of
the target by limiting the rotation range.
yyON
The tool window will search
with the range ± few degrees
wider than the setting value
yySelect whether or not to allow the margin for
Margin of rotation range. ON
the limited angle set in Rotation Range.
yyOFF
The tool window will search
only within the set rotation
range.
yyHigh Accuracy
Differences in outlines can
be detected with a high
degree of accuracy.
yyHigh Speed
Search The detection mode of the Outline tool can be High
Outlines can be judged faster
Algorithm selected according to the target. Accuracy
than in high accuracy mode.
There may be the influence
from the background or
unnecessary outlines other
than the target.

Rotation Range
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and 2 After the setting is completed, click the
set a rotation range of the Outline tool. [Settings] tab.
The system returns to the main screen for

Outline tool > Extended Functions Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool

Margin
Search Algorithm
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and 1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and
select a search algorithm type (High
select a margin of the Outline tool. Accuracy/High Speed).
4
yySelect [ON] when detection is not stable

because of the influence of the rotation angle
of the target.
The tool window will search with the range yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is
± few degrees wider than the setting value of not stable because of a small difference in
rotation range. the matching rate of a high and low-quality-
(The tool window will search ± few degrees target.
even if the rotation range is set to 0°) yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is
not stable because of the influence of an
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect
unnecessary outline other than the target such
the target in accordance with the set rotation
as the background.
angle of the target. yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing
time.
[Settings] tab.
[Settings] tab.
Outline tool settings. The system returns to the main screen for the

4
4-41
MEMO
Color Area/Area tool
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool
Default
value
yyRect
4 Specifies with the rectangular
window. An arbitrary size, position,
and angle can be specified.
yyCircle
Select the window shape
Specifies with the circular window.
Window Shape to specify an area of the Rect
An arbitrary size and position can
target to be extracted.
be specified.
yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of an
image displayed in the PC becomes
the extraction target.
Angle Reset is set to [Rect], resets the - -
Adds a rectangular/circular
Edit Window
mask region in the tool yyRect

Add window frame. Inside the Specifies a rectangular mask
Mask mask region is excluded region or a mask cutting region. An
from an area extraction arbitrary size, position, and angle
target. can be specified.
yyCircle
Adds a rectangular/circular Rect
Specifies a circular mask region or
cutting region in the mask a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
region. Inside the mask size and position can be specified.
Cut
Mask cutting region, the mask is yySetting counts
Mask Adding or cutting the mask can be
disabled and it becomes
the target of the area set up to 20 times.
extraction.
The previous operation
can be cancelled.
Undo - -
You can undo back to 20
operations before.
Deletes the mask region
Clear - -
which has been set.

Default
value
yyExtract Area [+]
Expands an range of the color to be
extracted and expands an extraction
area.
yyExtract Area [-]
Sets an extraction range Contracts a range of the color to be
Color Extraction by clicking the color to be
extracted and narrows an extraction area.
yyUndo (No extraction) 4
(For color type) extracted in the master

image or Live image.
yyClear
Cancels the selection of the
extracted color.
yyto Live Image
The color range to be extracted can be
set on the Live image of the target.
yyBrightness Range
Sets the upper and the lower limit
of brightness in a range within 0 to
255 with the clicked brightness as a
reference.
Sets an extraction range yyUndo
Brightness Extraction by clicking brightness to The previous operation can be
(No extraction)
(For monochrome type) be extracted in the master cancelled.
image or Live image. yyClear
Cancels the selection of the
extracted brightness.
yyto Live Image
A brightness range to be extracted can
be set on the Live image of the target.
Adjusts a threshold
0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting
Match (matching rate*) used in 50
is OFF)
the OK/NG judgment.
Sets the upper limit of the
threshold. yyON (checked)
Set when the OK/NG Activates the upper limit setting.
Upper Limit Disable
judgment is desired when yyOFF (not checked)
Limit Adjustment
the target area is larger Deactivates the upper limit setting.

than the OK area.
When the upper limit yy0 - 200
of the threshold is ON, Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
select the threshold scale threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
Scale 0 - 200
in accordance with the yy0 - 999
range of the matching rate Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
required for the judgment. threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
Changes to the Test mode,
and the threshold can
Live Adjustment - -
be adjusted to the best
* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area
and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting
range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.
Setting the Color Area/Area tool 6 Perform the mask setting as needed.
2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.

4 (Page 4-4)
3 Add the Color Area/Area tool.

“Adding a tool” (Page 4-31) “Mask settings” (Page 4-47)

The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool
settings opens.
7 Set an area to be the target to extract.
zz
For color type
4 Select a tool window shape. Click the [Setup] button of the color extraction.
The screen to select a color to be extracted opens.

Rect Circle Click the color to be the reference of judgment
for the area.
Click
When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will

be hidden.
5 Set the position, size, and angle of tool The clicked color will be extracted.
window in accordance with a target.
Set the tool

window

“Editing
��

yyIf the areas of color that have not been yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been
extracted are clicked repeatedly, the extraction extracted are clicked repeatedly, the extraction
range can be added. range can be added.
yyClick the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range,
and the range of color to be extracted can be yyAdjust the slider, and the range of brightness to
expanded/reduced. be extracted can be expanded/reduced.

yyBy clicking the [to Live Image] button, the yyBy clicking the [to Live Image] button, the
range of the color to be extracted can be set range of brightness to be extracted can be
with the Live Image of the target. set with the Live Image of the target.
yyTo re-extract the color, click the [Clear] button yyTo re-extract brightness, click the [Clear]
and then click the color to be the reference of button and then click brightness to be the
judgment again. reference of judgment again.
After the setting is completed, click the [OK] button. After the setting is completed, click the [OK]
The system returns to the main screen to set button.
the Color Area tool settings.
zz
For monochrome type Area tool settings.
Click the [Setup] button of the Brightness Extraction.
8 Click the [Live Adjustment] button.
The screen to select brightness to be extracted

opens.
Click brightness to be the reference of judgment
for the color area.
Click
The sensor turns to Test mode.
The clicked brightness will be extracted.

9 Image a high-quality-target and 11 Set the upper limit as needed.

low-quality-target. “Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-48)
trigger, input the external trigger. 12 After the setting is completed, click the
If an external trigger cannot be input, click the [OK] button.
button (Page 3-11) to image the The system returns to the main screen for the
target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Color Area/Area tool settings.
4 the imaging with an internal trigger finishes. 13 Set the tool name as needed.
“Setting a tool name” (Page 4-38)
10 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection 14 Click the [OK] button.

<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target
is higher than 90 and if the matching rate of
the low-quality-target is lower than 40, set the
threshold to 65 which is an intermediate value
between 40 and 90.
The system returns to the main screen for tool
settings.

rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
the display color of the tool changes.
slider or with the [+]/[-] button.


Mask settings 4 Set the position, size, and angle of the
Perform the following procedures if a mask region mask shape in accordance with the target.
is to be specified in the tool window.
1 Click the [Mask] button.

Set the
mask shape

“Editing
��
2 Click the [Add Mask] button.
[OK] button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask
region.
6 Click the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask

region.
3 Select the mask shape.
7 Select the clip shape.

8 Set the position, size, and angle of the

Setting the upper limit
cutting shape in accordance with the target. To perform the OK/NG judgment when an area of
the target is wider than an area of a high-quality-
target, perform the following procedures.
Set clip
1 Place a check mark to the check box of
shape
the upper limit.
4

“Editing the tool window” (Page 3-12)�.
9 After the setting is completed, click the The slider to set the upper limit and the lower
[OK] button.
limit of the threshold will be displayed.
Select the Settings scale from [0-200] or [0-999]
extended functions settings. in accordance with the range of the matching
rate necessary for judgment.
2 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

Area not to
be masked
Area to be
masked
10 Repeat steps 2 to 9 as needed and set the

mask region.
11 After the setting is completed, click the Threshold (lower limit) Matching rate
[Settings] tab. Threshold (upper limit)
The system returns to the main screen to set the
Color Area/Area tool. yyJudged OK when the matching rate is within
a threshold range, and NG when it is outside
the range.
the display color of the tool changes.


Setting the tool name
An arbitrary name such as a name of a target can
be set to tools (up to 8 characters).
The tool name can be confirmed in the main screen
in [Run].
1 Input any name into the text box. 4

If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed,
characters might be garbled.

Outline tool Color Area/ Area tool > Extended Functions Position Adjustment tool
Extended Functions of the Color Area/Area tool

Default
value
yyH (hue)
0° to 359°
(both starting point and
Advanced Color Specifies a color to be extracted ending point)
4 Extraction
(For color type only)
as HSB (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B:
Brightness).
yyS (saturation)
0 to 255
-
yyB (brightness)
0 to 255
A color/brightness range to be
to Live
extracted can be set on the Live - -
Image
image of the target.
yyDisable
Matches the area
extracted from the master
image as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.
Select a condition which the yyEnable: Large
Fixed Reference Area matching rate of the Color Area/ Matches 1/10th of the Disable
Area is 100%. total sensor view as the
criteria of a rate of 100%.
yyEnable: Small
Matches 1/100th of the
total sensor view as the
criteria of a rate of 100%.


Advanced settings for color extraction
Fixed Reference Area
(for color type only)
Select [Enable] if the color to be judged in the
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and master image cannot be detected.
click the [Setup] button of [Advanced
Color Extraction].
The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference
area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool
Auto Tuning target. 4
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and click

the [Setup] button of [Fixed Reference Area].
2 Specify the color or brightness of the

extraction target.
2 Select a condition which the matching rate

of the Color Area/Area tool will be 100%.
and click [OK] button.
When the [to Live Image] button is clicked, the

range of the color to be extracted can be set
on the Live image of the target.

[OK] button.
extended functions settings.
4 Click the [Settings] tab.

Color Area/Area tool settings.
extended functions settings.

3 Extract the color/brightness range to be zz

Extract from the master image, and then
judge. move the tool window
zz
Extract from the Live image Select the [Settings] tab and move the tool window.
Select the [Settings] tab and click [Setup] button By clicking the [Setup] button of the Color/
of the Color/Brightness Extraction. Brightness Extraction, extract the color/
By clicking the [to Live Image] button, extract brightness range to be judged.
the color/brightness range to be judged from Click the [OK] button and move the tool window
4 “LIVE” image. to the position where the color/brightness is to

be judged.
Extract the color/brightness

The color to be extracted can be specified by
using HSB (H:hue, S:saturation, B:brightness)
in [Advanced settings for color extraction].
“Advanced settings for color extraction (for
color type only)” (Page 4-51)
Move

[OK] button.
Color Area/Area tool settings.

Position Adjustment tool

If there are varies of the position determining of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from
the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The amount that the target is off-centered in regards to the master image will be calculated by the internal
sensor and corrected by the position adjustment tool, so the off-centered position can be detected correctly
even if the position was off-centered.
Tool settings
Master image
Run
4

Tool window Tool window
Position adjustment window Position adjustment window
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being used, the processing time will be longer.
yyIn the case of the outline tool, the search range position will be adjusted. The outline of a target is
searched in adjusted search range and the searched outline will be judged.
yyUsed when an area of the target to be examined and a relative position of the target are determined
and when there is variability in determining the position (position or angle) of a target. For example,
intended purposes are shown below.
- For package box, whether or not the seal is put in the determined area and direction.
- For components, whether logos/symbols/insignias are in-print or not.
yyIf the position adjustment fails, the result of position adjustment is NG. In this case, the total status
result is NG. The individually set detection tool will not be judged. Failure of position adjustment can
be checked with position adjustment output. Review the position adjustment settings and position
determining accuracy for a target.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the following settings for the detection tools have been set
will be changed.
- Outline tool : When the search region is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default
value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
- Color Area/Area tool : When the window shape is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the
default value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in one program. By setting the position adjustment, the
position adjustment will be applied to all detection tools.
yyFor details of matching rate, refer to “Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment
Tool” (Page A-5).

Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool

Default
value
yyRect
Specifies with the rectangular window. An
Select a shape of the
arbitrary size, position, and angle can be
Window window to specify the range
specified. Rect
of a target to be the position
4 Shape
adjustment reference.
yyCircle
Specifies with the circular window. An
arbitrary size and position can be specified.
Edit Window

Angle
is set to [Rect], resets the - -
Reset
Specifies a area to search yyEntire
a target to be a reference Specifies entire imaging area as a search
Search of position adjustment. By region.
Entire
Region specifying the narrower area as yyPartial
a search region, the processing Specifies a search region to an arbitrary
time will be shortened. size in the imaging area.
yyHigh Sensitivity
Extracts an outline of the image with low
contrast. Used when an outline you wish
to detect cannot be extracted.
The extraction sensitivity of
yyNormal Sensitivity Normal
Sensitivity an outline can be selected
Extracts the standard outline. Sensitivity
according to a target.
yyLow Sensitivity
Reduces the extracted volume of an
Fine Tune Outline
outline. Reduces the extracted volume of

an outline that not necessary to detect.
yyUndo
You can undo back to 20 operations before.
Unnecessary outlines yyRedo
which obstruct the steady Returns to the state before clicking the
Remove Not
position adjustments can [Undo] button.
Outline specified
be disabled. Specifies by yyClear
tracing the extracted outline. Initializes all the disabling processes.
yySize
Select the size (size of the mouse cursor) for
when specifying the unnecessary outlines.
Adjusts a threshold (matching
rate*) which judges whether
Limit Adjustment
Match 0 to 100 70
or not the position adjustment
is succeeded.
Changes to the Test mode,
Live and the threshold can
- -
Adjustment be adjusted to the best
* 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts.

Setting the position adjustment tool 6 Set the position, size, and angle of tool
window in accordance with a target.

2 Display the main screen for the Tool Set the tool
window
settings.
(Page 4-4)
4

3 Add the Position Adjustment tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-31)
The main screen for the Position Adjustment Set the position and size of tool window as
tool settings opens. large as possible by selecting the part that is
dissimilar in shape.
4 Select the tool window shape. “Stabilizing the position adjustment” (Page 5-34)

“Editing
��
7 Set the sensitivity and disable outline

settings as needed.
Rect Circle
5 Set a search region as needed. “Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37)

“Settings for removing outlines” (Page 4-38)

8 Click the [Live Adjustment] button. 10 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not
the position adjustment is succeeded by
checking the matching rate.
4
The sensor turns to the Test mode.

9 Image a target.
If the target is to be imaged using an external yyIf there are many variation of target shapes
trigger, input the external trigger. that a tool window has been set to, set the
If an external trigger cannot be input, click the threshold to a lower matching rate.
button (Page 3-11) to image the rate is greater than the threshold, and
target by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
the imaging with an internal trigger finishes. the display color of the tool changes.

[OK] button.
Position Adjustment tool settings.
The system returns to the main screen for tool

settings.


Setting a search region
Setting a sensitivity
To limit a range (adjusting range of position According to the target, perform the following
adjustment) to search a target to be a reference, procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
set it in the search region settings. When a range outline is selected.
of the search region is to be specified, perform the
following procedures. 1 Select the extraction sensitivity of an
outline from the pull-down menu of the
1 Select [Partial]. [Sensitivity]
4
The outline

which cannot be
extracted
The editing screen for a search region opens.

Select [High Sensitivity] in this section.
2 Set the tool window indicates a search 2 Confirm an outline extracting condition
region of the tool window.
which changes in accordance with the
[Sensitivity].
Search Extracted
region outline
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to

“Editing
��
yyThe search region cannot be rotated.


Settings for disabling outlines 3 After the setting is completed, click the
Perform the following procedures to delete an [OK] button.
unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window. The system returns to the main screen for the
1 Click the [Remove Outline] button.
4
2 Specify an unnecessary outline in the

basic shape of position adjustment by
dragging with the mouse.
The specified outline changes from green to
yellow.
Mouse cursor
(Eraser)
The outline that the outline

extraction has disabled
(yellow)
yyThe size of mouse cursor for when specifying

the unnecessary outlines can be changed in
[Size].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 20 times.

Outline tool Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool > Extended Functions
Extended Functions for the Position Adjustment tool

Default
value
Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction.
The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting
the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range.
Rotation 0 to ±180°
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable ±20°
Range (Unit: ±1°)
range of variation in angles when a target is placed.
yyIf the setting of rotation range
processing time can be shorten.
is too narrow, the
4
yyON

The tool window will
search with the range
± few degrees wider
Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited than the setting value
Margin ON
angle set in Rotation Range. of rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will
search only within the
set rotation range.

Rotation Range
Margin
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and 1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and set
set the rotation range of the Position the margin of the Position Adjustment tool.
Adjustment tool.

[Settings] tab.
yy Select [ON] when the position adjustment is not stable

because of the influence of the rotation angle of the target.
The tool window will search with the range ± few
degrees wider than the setting value of rotation range.
(The tool window will search ± few degrees
even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)
yy Select [OFF] when you would like to detect the target in
accordance with the set rotation angle of the target.
2 After the setting is completed, click the [Settings] tab.


(Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)
Set the output items to be assigned to the output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
��
“Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor” (Page 2-8)
��
“Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1)
Main screen for the Output Assignment
(1)
4
(2)
(3)
(4) (6)
(7)
(5)
(8) (9)

Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and yy[Output Assignment] tab
program name (Page 6-12). Assigns the output item to each output line.
(2) Shortcut button “Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 4-61)
Displays the shortcut button to each step. yy[Extended Functions] tab
Sets the total status conditions and logics.
(3) [Image type] display “Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)
Displays the image type. “Setting Logics” (Page 4-64)
yyMaster...............Displays the master image
(still image). (7) [Valid]/[Invalid] setting for the trigger error
output
(4) Image tool bar Select whether to enable/disable the output
Displays the tools for operating the image taken when the trigger error occurred.
by the sensor. “Error Messages” (Page A-19)
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)
(8) [Back] button
(5) Master image Returns to the Tool settings screen.
Displays the master image. “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for
(9) [Complete] button
Finishes the Settings Navigator.

Output Assignment Extended Functions
Setting range of the Output Assignment Setting the Output Assignment
Setting
range
Description 1 Start the Settings Navigator.
Do not output.
OFF
Output function will be constantly OFF. 2 Display the main screen for the Output
When the total status result of the Assignment.
Total Status
tools which have been set was OK,
the output function turns ON.
(Page 4-4)
4
The condition of the total status can

be selected from [All Tools OK] / [Any
Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. 3 Click the item name of output line to
perform output assignment and select the
Tot. When the total status result was
StatusNG NG, the output function turns ON. output item.
When the sensor is running with no

RUN system error occurred, the output
function turns ON.
The output function turns ON when
the system is in a state that cannot
input additional trigger; such as
BUSY
during imaging, judging processing,
switching programs, and registering
external master images.
The output function turns ON when
an error is occurred; such as system
error, memory read out error for
Error
start-up, external master registration
error, and trigger error (when the
trigger settings are enabled).
When position adjustment
Position
processing is finished normally, the
Adjustment
output function turns ON.
When the status result of specified
4 Finishes the Settings Navigator.
Tool 01 to tool is OK, the output function turns
16 ON. Status results can be output by
each tool.
When the status result of specified logic
Logic 1 to 4
is OK, the output function turns ON.

Default value
OUT1 : Total Status (N.O.)
OUT2 : BUSY (N.O.)
OUT3 : Error (N.C.)
OUT4 : OFF
Trigger Error : OFF
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.

“Output Settings” (Page 6-27)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.

Extended functions for the Output Assignment
Extended functions items for the Output Assignment
Default
value
yyAll Tools OK
4 When all of the status results of the
detection tools was OK, the total
status output function turns ON.

Selects a condition for the total yyAny Tools OK
Total Status status result. The total status When any of the status results of
All Tools OK
Conditions result is displayed in accordance the detection tools was OK, the total
with the selected condition. status output function turns ON.
yyLogic 1 to 4
When the status result of the set
logic was OK, the total status
output function turns ON.
yyUnused
The selected items are not used in
a logical formula.
Assigns the logical operation yyUsed
results of each detection tool to When the status results of the
Logic Settings the output function. selected items were OK, the total Unused
Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can status output function turns ON.
be defined. yyUsed (Inverse)
When the status results of the
selected items were NG, the total
status output function turns ON.
yyAND
Calculates the logical multiply
Selects the logical operation (AND) of all selected items.
Logic AND
method of logics. yyOR
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of
all selected items.

Setting the Total Status Conditions zz

Logic 1 to 4
When the status result of the defined logic was
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and OK, the total status output function turns ON.
select a total status condition. Logic OK
1 to 4 NG
Total OK
Status NG
Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]
4

yyWhen the position adjustment failed, the
The total status result is displayed in
status result of each tool is NG.
accordance with the selected condition.
yyIf the Area tool window is protruded from
zz
All Tools OK the imaging area when position adjustment
When all of the detection tools were OK, the succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and
total status output function turns ON. the status result is NG.
OK
Tool A
NG 2 When the setting is completed, click the
[Output Assignment] tab.
OK
Tool B The system returns to the main screen for the
NG
Output Assignment settings.
Total OK
Status NG

status condition is [All Tools OK]
zz
Any Tools OK
When any of the detection tools was OK, the
total status output function turns ON.
OK
Tool A
NG
OK
Tool B
NG
Total OK
Status NG

status condition is [Any Tools OK]
For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the

position adjustment is not included in the total
status conditions.

Setting Logics
yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic
output is the logical multiply (AND) of the
1 Select the [Extended Functions] tab and status results of each selected item.
select a total status condition.
yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic
output is the logical sum (OR) of the status
results of each selected item.
4 4 Select items to be integrated into the

logic.
The status result of the logic is calculated from

OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used
2 Click the number which the logic (Inverse)] has been set.
judgement condition is to be defined.
zz
Logic : AND
Tool A
Tool B Logic 1 to 4
Tool C
(Inverse)
Image of logic output when the Logic

Each Logic Settings screen appears. is [AND]
When an undefined detection tool has been Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic
defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is OK OK OK NG
selected.] is displayed on the right side of the
logic number. NG OK OK NG
OK NG OK NG
3 Select the logical operation method of the NG NG OK NG

logic. OK OK NG OK
NG OK NG NG
OK NG NG NG
NG NG NG NG

zz
Logic : OR 5 When the setting is completed, click the
[OK] button.
Tool A
Tool B Logic 1 to 4 Extended Functions settings.
Tool C
(Inverse)
6 Click the [Output Assignment] tab.
Image of logic output when the Logic The system returns to the main screen for the
is [OR]
Output Assignment settings.
Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic

4

OK OK OK OK
NG OK OK OK
OK NG OK OK
NG NG OK NG
OK OK NG OK
NG OK NG OK
OK NG NG OK
NG NG NG OK
yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used

(Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/
Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4).
yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items
were OK, the status output function for items
in the logic turns ON.
yyWhen the status results of the [Used
(Inverse)] items were NG, the status output
function for items in the logic turns ON.
yyTo define a logic which has been set to
another logic, use the logic number which
is greater than the logic number which has
been set.
For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4
in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic.
When the program number has been changed

and you went to [Run] from [Program] after
the power ON, the judgement is not done if no
trigger input. The judgement output of each
tool is OFF.

MEMO
4-66
4
5
This chapter explains the procedures for starting
the operation, the names and functions of each part
Operating/Adjusting displayed in [Run] main screen and the adjustment
procedures to fully utilize the judgment ability of the
IV Series.
Starting an Operation.........................................5-2
Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]....5-3
Names and Functions of the Screen in 5
[Run] / [Program]................................................5-4
Operating/Adjusting
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment...............5-14
Tool Auto Tuning
(Automatically Adjusting the Judgment
Condition)..........................................................5-15
Stabilizing the Judgment Process..................5-29
Shortening the Processing Time....................5-37

Starting an Operation
Starting an Operation
Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator.
The sensor can be independently operated.
Turning on the power and starting Exiting the sensor settings and
an operation starting an operation
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and boot 1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as
up IV-Navigator. Settings Navigator.
“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator “Finishing
��
the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-5)
5 (Direct Connection)” (Page 3-6) The main screen in [Program] opens.
2 Click the [Run] button.
Operating/Adjusting
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-6)
2 Confirm that main screen in [Run] opens.
The main screen of [Run] appears and starts

running.
If the image or status result does not update, If the image or status result does not update,
refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-16). refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-16).

Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]
Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]
Main screen in [Run]

(Page 5-4)
Tool information display

Displays the threshold/judgment value by tools
and the histogram for status result. (Page 5-12)
Operating/Adjusting
Statistical information display
Displays statistical information of status results.
(Page 5-10)
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup)

Sets the program to use for judgment. (Page 4-1)
Main screen in [Program]

(Page 5-4)
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the threshold for tools. (Page 5-14)
Tool Auto Tuning

Based on OK/NG images, automatically adjusts the extraction condition
for threshold for tools and the Color Area/Area tool. (Page 5-15)

Names and Functions of the Screen in [Run] / [Program]
Names and Functions of the Screen in

[Run] / [Program]
Main screen in [Run] / [Program]
zz
Main screen in [Run] zz
Main screen in [Program]
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (7)
(8) (8)
(15)
(9) (9) (17)
(10) (18)
5 (11) (16)
(19)
(12) (12)
Operating/Adjusting
(13) (20)
(14) (14)
(1) [Run] / [Program] switch button (7) Menu bar

Switches the main screen in [Run] and [Program]. “Operating from the menu bar” (Page 6-45)
yyBy clicking the [Program] button on the main (8) Status bar
screen in [Run], the operation stops and In the main screen in [Run], the total status result,
switches to the main screen in [Program]. trigger type, and processing time are displayed.
yyBy clicking the [Run] button on the main yyIf the total status result is OK, OK will be
screen in [Program], the setting finishes and displayed. The total status conditions can be
switches to the main screen in [Run]. selected from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/
(2) Program information [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and yyIf the total status result is NG, NG will be
program name (Page 6-12). displayed.
Programs can be switched from the pull-down yyProcessing time indicates the time from
menu. receiving the external or internal trigger until
(3) [Detail] button determining the status result. In the case of the
Displays the Program Details screen. One-Shot output (Page 6-27), the ON-Delay
“Displaying the Program Details screen” Time is not included.
(Page 6-11) In the main screen in [Program], the image type
(Master) and trigger type are displayed.
(4) [Image Hist] button
Displays the Sensor’s internal image history screen. (9) Image tool bar
“Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming the Displays the tool for operating the image
Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-15) displayed on the IV-Navigator.
“Operating
��
the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)
(5) [I/O Settings] button
Displays the I/O Settings screen. (10) Tool window
“Setting the Input and Output Information of Displays the selected tool region with a green
the Sensor” (Page 6-26) frame when the status result is OK, and displays
with a red frame when the status result is NG.
(6) [Advanced] button You can also switch the selected tool by clicking
Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen. the designated region.
“Setting the Advanced Information of the “Selecting a display method for tools”
Sensor” (Page 6-30) (Page 5-7)

(11) Search region

If the search region of the selected tool is yy"Lock Enabled" will be displayed in the lower
being set to Partial, the search region will be right of the main screen in [Run] if the password
displayed with a light blue frame. If the position lock is being set.
adjustment is being set, the search region after
position adjustment will be displayed.
(12) Brightness correction region Password is required when while switching to
When the brightness correction is being set, the the [Program] main screen.
“Security” (Page 6-34)
brightness correction region will be displayed
yySearch area and tool window will be hidden
with a blue frame.
(13) Statistical information display
when you select [OFF] for display methods for
tools (Page 5-7). 5
Displays the statistical information of the status
Operating/Adjusting
result (default value: hidden).
“Displaying the statistical information”
(Page 5-10)
(14) Sensor Information
Displays the model, device name (Page 6-31),
connection method ([Direct connection] or [IP
address of network connection]) (Page 6-32),
and MAC address (Page 6-31) for the sensor.
(15) Status gauge
Displays the status gauge by tools which have
been set.
“Displaying the tool information” (Page 5-12)
(16) Tool information ([Match] tab)
Displays the information for the selected tool.
“Displaying the tool information” (Page 5-12)
(17) [Sensor Setup] button
Displays the Settings Navigator screen.
��
(18) [Limit Adjustment] button
Displays the Limit Adjustment screen.
(19) [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button
Displays the Tool Auto Tuning screen for auto
tuning.
“Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)
(20) Master image display
Displays the master image registered to the currently
selected program. If no master image is registered,
[No Master Image] will be displayed.

Enlarging the image display Selecting the tool whose

The display magnification of images can be information to be displayed
changed. There are two methods for selecting tools, whose information
you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool from the status
1 Change the magnification ratio to the gauge and (2) clicking the tool region on the image.
desired ratio by clicking the or

Selecting the tool from the status gauge
button.
1 Click the tool whose information you wish
to display from the status gauge.
5
Operating/Adjusting
For details of the image tool bar, refer to

“Operating
��
the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)�.
2 Adjust the display position of the enlarged Click the tool

image as needed.
Information of the selected tool will be displayed.
yyDrug the image to change the display
position enlarged image. Selected tool
yyIf you click the or button after
changing the display position, the image will
be enlarged/reduced with reference to the
center of the displayed image. Information of
the selected tool

Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image
Selected tool
Click the tool
Information of the clicked tool will be displayed.
clicked tool
Information of
the clicked tool

Selecting a display method for tools Display methods for tools

If you select a tool display method from the tool Depending on the type of the sensor (color or
display pull-down menu, the display method for tools monochrome type), selectable display methods are
changes in accordance with the selected item. different.
1 Select the display method from display

For color type
method pull-down menu in accordance
with the intended purpose. zz
OFF
Operating/Adjusting
The display method for tools changes in The tool windows and search regions of all tools
accordance with the selected menu. become hidden.
For details of the tool display methods, refer to
“Display methods for tools” (Page 5-7).
zz
Window
Selected tool
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Color
Area tool, the region that the tool window and
mask region are combined will be displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
blue.
Non selected tools
thin line.
yyThe search region and mask region will not be
displayed.
Common
When the result of position adjustment and the
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
displayed in green. If one of the results is NG,
the tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in
blue.

zz
Process 1
For monochrome type
zz
OFF
Inside the tool

window
Outside the tool
window
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
following are different. The rest are the same.
5 Selected tool The tool windows and search regions of all tools
yyOutline tool become hidden.
Operating/Adjusting
Displays inside the tool window in zz

Window
monochrome, and outside of the tool window
in color. Indicates the recognized outline with
a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
If the brightness correction has been set,
inside the tool window is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
zz
Process 2 Selected tool
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Area
tool, the region that the tool window and mask
region are combined will be displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
Inside the search blue.
region
Non selected tools
Outside the
search region yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thin line.
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, yyThe search region and the mask region will
the following are different. The rest are the same. not be displayed.
Selected tool Common
yyOutline tool When the result of position adjustment and the
Displays inside the tool window and search status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
region in monochrome, and outside of the displayed in green. If one of the results is NG,
search region in color. the tool will be displayed in red.
If the brightness correction has been set, Displays the brightness correction window in
inside the search region is displayed with the blue.
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays inside the tool window in monochrome.
The extracted region is displayed in the color of
the target.

zz
Process zz
Process 2
Inside the search

region
Outside the
search region
This is selectable for the Area tool and for the This is selectable for the Outline tool for which
Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has
not been set.
[Brightness Correction] has been set.
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected, 5
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the the following are different. The rest are the same.
Operating/Adjusting
Selected tool
Selected tool
Displays inside the search region with brightness
yyOutline tool
corrected and outside of the search region with
Indicates the recognized outline with a series
of points in green (OK) or red (NG). brightness before correction.
yyArea tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
If the brightness correction has been set,
inside the tool window will be displayed with
the corrected brightness and outside of the
tool window will be displayed with brightness
before correction.
zz
Process 1
Inside the tool

window
Outside the tool
window
This is selectable for the Outline tool for which

[Brightness Correction] has been set.
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
Selected tool
Indicates the recognized outline with a series of
points in green (OK) or red (NG).
Displays inside the tool window with the corrected
brightness and outside the tool window with
brightness before correction.

Displaying the statistical information (3) Trigger count information

Displays the information related to the number
When the [Statistics] button in the [View] menu is of triggers.
selected, the statistical information of judgment is yyTrigger No.........Displays the total number of
displayed. triggers issued. This number
does not include the number
Displaying the statistical information of trigger errors.
yyOK.....................Displays the number of
1 Select [View] → [Statistics] on menu bar triggers issued with the total
status OK.
to place a check mark next to [Statistics]. yyNG.....................Displays the number of
triggers issued with the total
5 status NG.
yyTrigErrorNo.......Displays the number of triggers
issued as error triggers.
Operating/Adjusting
(4) [Reset Stat.] button

Resets the statistical information and histograms.
yyYou can copy the statistical information to

The statistical information will be displayed. clipboard by right-clicking in the statistical
information screen.
yyThe upper limit of Trigger No. is 999999. When
the number exceeds the upper limit, the counter
resets to 0 and starts counting again.
yyThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrorNo
is 999999. The values display stops updating
when the upper limit is reached.
yyThe statistical information is reset under the
following conditions.
- When the [Reset Stat.] button is clicked
- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
(1) (2) (3) (4) - When the upper limit of the Color Area/Area
tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting
Contents of the statistical information are as follows. scale is changed by the user operation or Tool
(1) OUT information Auto Tuning
- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
Displays the latest status results of items which
more than two tools other than the position
are assigned to an output line (OUT1 to OUT4) adjustment tool are being set
(Page 4-60). - When the program is switched
- When each correction of the setup adjustment
(2) Processing time information
is started
Displays information related to the processing - When the sensor is initialized
time.
yyTIME.................Displays the processing time
of the last judgment process.
yyMAX..................Displays the maximum value of
the processing time.
yyMIN...................Displays the minimum value of
yyAVE...................Displays the average value of

Hiding the statistical information
1 Select [View] → [Statistics] on menu bar

to release the check mark.
5
The statistical information becomes hidden.
Operating/Adjusting

Displaying the tool information Contents of the tool information are as follows.
You can display or hide the selected tool information (1) Status gauge
with the [View] menu. Displays the tools set in the program. Tool
name, threshold, matching rate for each tool
The matching rate histograms are displayed by and status result are displayed.
default. Status result OK is displayed in green and NG
is displayed in red.
Displaying the tool information yyJudge is OK
5 1 Select [View] → [Tool Data] on menu bar Tool Name Threshold

to place a check mark next to [Tool Data].
Matching rate and
Operating/Adjusting
yyJudge is NG status result
For details on the status results,

refer to “Displaying and outputting the status
result” (Page A-4).
(2) Tool Name

The tool information will be displayed. Displays the tool name of the selected tool.
(3) Histogram
Displays the histogram (frequency distribution)
of the selected tool.
With the threshold being a border, the range
for OK is displayed in green and for NG is
displayed in red.
yyAbscissa axis....Displays the distribution
range of the matching rate.
The display range is fixed. It
(1) cannot be specified arbitrary.
yyVertical axis.......Adjusted automatically in
accordance with the maximum
value of the frequency. It
cannot be specified arbitrary.
(2)
(4) Matching rate of the latest judgment process
Displays the matching rate of the latest
(3) judgment process.
Click the match bar to move to the limit
adjustment (Page 5-14).
(4)
(5) Threshold
Displays the threshold of the selected tool.
(5) (6) (7)

(6) Judgment record

Hiding the tool information
Displays the judgment process counts for OK or
NG.
yyOK....Displays the process counts for "OK".
1 Select [View] → [Tool Data] on menu bar
to release the check mark.
yyNG....Displays the process counts for "NG".
If the judgment threshold is changed, the histogram

is updated according to the result judged by the
changed threshold.
However, the counts judged by the previous
threshold are displayed in the judgment record.
Therefore, the judgment condition on the histogram 5
may be different from the judgment record.
The tool information becomes hidden.
Operating/Adjusting
(7) Matching rate information
yyMAX...........Displays the maximum value of
the matching rate.
yyMIN............Displays the minimum value of the
matching rate.
yyAVE............Displays the average value of the
matching rate.
yyThe upper limit of judgment processing count

display for the judgment record is 999999.
Update of the value stops when the value
reached the upper limit.
yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999. The
values display stops updating when the upper
limit is reached.
yyThe histogram and judgment record are reset
under the following conditions:
- When the [Reset Stat.] button is clicked
- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
- When the upper limit of the Color Area/Area
tool is enabled/disabled or when the setting
scale is changed by the user operation or Tool
Auto Tuning
- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
more than two tools other than the position
adjustment tool are being set
- When the program is switched
- When each correction of the setup adjustment
is started
- When the sensor is initialized
yy[Reset Stat.] button is displayed together with
the statistical information.
“Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10)

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
The method for manually adjusting the threshold 5 Adjust the threshold by checking the
while in the Test mode. matching rate.
<Setting example>
The threshold can be adjusted by the Limit If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
Adjustment in the tool settings of the Settings higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-
Navigator. quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to
65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.
1 Open the main screen in [Program].

“Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]”
(Page 5-3)
5 2 Click the [Limit Adjustment] button.
Operating/Adjusting
Adjust the
threshold
Matching rate
The [Limit Adjustment] button is available
when the program that the tool has been set is
selected. yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is
greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
The Limit Adjustment screen appears.
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with the status result of the
3 If multiple tools are set in the program, tool, the display color of the tool changes.
select the tool to adjust the threshold. “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed by using the
Select the tool slider or inputting values.
yyA target is judged by the new threshold from
the judgment process of the trigger output
after the threshold is changed.
yyThe threshold can be adjusted by checking
the histogram result. The displayed contents
during threshold adjustment are as follows.
4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be - The histogram before threshold adjustment
is displayed.
the reference of judgment. - The status results during threshold
If the target is to be imaged using an external adjustment are not added to the frequency
trigger, input the external trigger. If an external distribution of the histogram.
- The judgment record and the matching rate
trigger cannot be input, click the
information (Page 5-12) are not displayed.
button (Page 3-11) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily.
6 After the adjustment is completed, click
When the button is clicked again, the [Complete] button.
the imaging with the internal trigger finishes. When the threshold is changed, the save settings
confirmation dialog appears. When the [Yes]
button is clicked, the settings will be saved, and the
system returns to the main screen in [Program].

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
Tool Auto Tuning

(Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically
Using the image history saved in the
adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool sensor
and the judgment threshold for each tool by using This is the method to register the image as an OK or
multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and low- an NG image to perform tuning while checking the
quality-targets (NG images). images read from the Sensor’s internal image history.
There are three methods to register the image to “Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming the
be used for Tool Auto Tuning. Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page 6-15)

Using the images taken in the Test
mode
This is the method to register the image as an
OK or an NG image to perform tuning while
5
Sensor’s internal image history
preparing the multiple high and low-quality-
Operating/Adjusting
target and checking the results of the test
operation.
Perform tuning by reading the

images judged as OK or NG from
the Sensor’s internal image history

Using the image files saved in the PC
This is the method to register the image as an OK or
an NG image to perform tuning while checking the
images read from the PC. Batch backup files (*.iva)
and image capture files (*.ivp) can be used.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-21)
“Saving images and screens displayed on
the IV-Navigator individually” (Page 6-22)
OK
NG Batch backup file (*.iva)

Image capture file (*.ivp)
OK
OK Perform tuning by
imaging targets which
NG
are judged as OK or NG
Perform tuning by reading the

images are judged as OK or NG
from PC.

Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning
Start Contents of the main screen for the Tool Auto
Tuning are as follows.
(1)
Select the tool (3)

(4)
(2)
(5)
5 Image a target (6)

Operating/Adjusting
(7)
Low-quality-target
Judgment of
(8) (9) (10)
an image?
(1) Tool panel
High-quality-target Displays the name and threshold of Tool Auto
Tuning target.
If you select an image in [OK Image List] or [NG
AutoTune as AutoTune as Image List], its judgment value and status result
OK NG
will be displayed.
(2) [Perform Image Registration] button
The image registration method screen is displayed
by clicking the [Perform Image Registration]
Automatically adjust the judgment
button. Select a registration method and perform
condition and threshold
Tool Auto Tuning.
“Register the images taken with the sensor”
(Page 5-19)
“Registering the images from the image
Yes history saved in the sensor” (Page 5-21)
Add image?
“Registering the image files saved in the PC”
(Page 5-23)
No
(3) [Show] button
Displays the display screen and displays the
Finish selected image in [OK Image List] or [NG Image
List].
* There are three methods to prepare images.
“Confirming or deleting the images registered
* Up to 24 images can be used for tuning.
for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-26)

(4) [Delete] button Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning

Deletes the selected image from the [OK Image
List] or [NG Image List]. Displays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from
“Confirming or deleting the images registered the main screen in [Program] to perform Tool Auto
for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-26) Tuning.
(5) Display Master Image

yyThe position adjustment tool is not target for the
Display the master image that is currently
Tool Auto Tuning.
registered. yyThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed
(6) [OK Image List] / [NG Image List] Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded
from a Tool Auto Tuning target.
Displays the image thumbnails registered as
OK image or NG image. 5
Operating/Adjusting
(7) [Test Running] button
Displays the test operation screen and perform
(Page 5-3)
the test operation in accordance with the OK
image / NG image registered in Tool Auto Tuning. 2 Click the [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning]
“Confirming the registration results in the button.
test mode” (Page 5-27)
(8) Registration information file name
Displays the registration information file name
for saving the result of Tool Auto Tuning .
(9) [Other Tools] button
If multiple tools are set in the program, a tool
selection screen will be displayed.
The import confirmation dialog for registration
(10) [Exit] button data file (*.ivm) appears.
Saves the registered OK image / NG image and
returns to the main screen in [Program].
3 Click the [No] button.

To perform the Tool Auto Tuning with registration
data file (*.ivm), click the [Yes] button.
For details, refer to “Tool Auto Tuning by the
previous registration information” (Page 5-27).

4 If multiple tools are set in the program, 7 To confirm or delete the registered images,
select the tool for Tool Auto Tuning, and click the [Show] or [Delete] button.
click the [OK] button.
Select the tool
“Confirming or deleting the images registered

5 The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning opens.
“The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning”
(Page 5-16)
8 To confirm the status result with the
Operating/Adjusting
registered contents, click the [Test

Running] button.
5 Click the [Perform Image Registration]
button.
“Confirming the registration results in the

The image registration method screen opens. test mode” (Page 5-27)
6 Select the registration source of the image 9 After the setting is completed, click the
to be registered to the Tool Auto Tuning [Exit] button.
and register the image.
zz
For registration of an image taken with the
The confirmation dialog whether or not to save
sensor
the settings appears.
“Register the images taken with the sensor”
(Page 5-19)
zz
For registration of an image whose history The confirmation dialog appears.
has been saved in the sensor
“Registering the images from the image
history saved in the sensor” (Page 5-21)
zz
For registration of an image file saved in the
PC
“Registering the image files saved in the PC”
(Page 5-23)

11 To save the registered image to Registering the OK/NG images to

the registration data file (*.ivm), be used for the Tool Auto Tuning
click the [Yes] button.
The save as screen opens.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program] Register the images taken with the sensor
if you the [No] button. Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
“Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration perform tuning while preparing the multiple high
information” (Page 5-27) and low-quality-target and checking the images
imaged.
12 Select an arbitrary folder and click the
[Save] button. 1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto 5
The image will be saved, and the system Tuning.
returns to the main screen in [Program]. “Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17)
Operating/Adjusting
button.
The image registration method screen opens.
3 Select [Take a Picture] and click the [OK]

button.
The image registration screen opens.
4 Image the high-quality-target to be the

criteria for OK status or low-quality-target
to be the criteria for NG status, and click
the [Register the image.] button.

trigger, input the external trigger. If an external
trigger cannot be input, click the
button (Page 3-11) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily.

5 Check the displayed image and select the zz

For Area tool (monochrome type)
[OK Image] or [NG Image] button.
zz
For Outline tool
5 If the extraction range is inappropriate, click

brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
Operating/Adjusting
brightness range to be extracted.

By clicking the [Capture image again.] button,
the system returns to the Live image to re-edit yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous
the image. operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change brightness of extraction target, click
zz
For Color Area tool (color type) the [Clear] button and click brightness to be
the reference of judgment again.
yyBy clicking the [Capture image again.] button,
the system returns to the Live image to re-edit
the image.
6 Click the [Registration] button.
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the

color to be the reference of judgment, or click
the [+]/[-] button for extract color settings to
expand/reduce the color range to be extracted. The changes in settings after the auto tuning
will be displayed.
If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message
yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the previous
to change the tool settings or the image to be
operation can be cancelled. registered.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, click
the [Clear] button and click the color to be 7 Check the changes in settings and click
the reference of judgment again. the [OK] button.
yyBy clicking the [Capture image again.] button,
the system returns to the Live image to re-edit
the image. Changed settings
The confirmation dialog to register another

image appears.

8 Click the [Yes] button and repeat step 2 to 7. Registering the images from the image
history saved in the sensor
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the Sensor’s internal image history.
yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG 1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto
images is recommended. Tuning.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered. “Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17)
9 After the registration is completed, click 2 Click the [Perform Image Registration] 5
the [No] button on the confirmation dialog. button.
Operating/Adjusting
The system returns to the main screen for Tool The image registration method screen opens.
Auto Tuning.
“Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17) 3 Select [Selection image history] and click
the [OK] button.
The Sensor’s internal image history screen

opens.
4 Select the image history to be the OK or

NG image and click the [OK] button.
Select the
image

5 Check the displayed image and select the zz

For Area tool (monochrome type)
The status result displayed on the screen is the

status result by the settings at the time of saving
the image.
If the tool settings are changed after the image
is saved, only the frame of the tool window will
be displayed regardless of selection of the tool
display method (Page 5-7). The processing
status will not be displayed.
5 If the extraction range is inappropriate, click
zz
For Outline tool
Operating/Adjusting

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change brightness of extraction target,
click the [Clear] button and click brightness
to be the reference of judgment again.
zz
For Color Area tool (color type) 6 Click the [Registration] button.
The changes in settings after the auto tuning

will be displayed.
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the to change the tool settings or the image to be
color to be the reference of judgment, or click registered.
the [+]/[-] button for color extraction settings to
expand/reduce the color range to be extracted. 7 Check the changes in settings and click
the [OK] button.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, click Changed settings
the [Clear] button and click the color to be

image appears.

8 Click the [Yes] button and repeat step 2 to 7. Registering the image files saved in the PC
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the files saved in the PC.
1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto

yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG Tuning.
images is recommended. “Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17)
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.
9 After the registration is completed, click button.
5
the [No] button on the confirmation dialog. The image registration method screen opens.
Operating/Adjusting
The system returns to the main screen for Tool
Auto Tuning. 3 Select [Selection file] and click the [OK]
button.
“Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17)
The open dialog appears.
4 Select the file type (the batch backup file

(*.iva) or image capture file (*.ivp)) for
loading images.
Select the file type
File formats other than iva or ivp cannot be

loaded.

5 Select a file and click the [Open] button. 7 Check the displayed image and select the
yyThe status result displayed on the screen for

the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status result
by the settings at the time of saving the image.
Only the frame of the tool window will be
displayed regardless of selection of the tool
display method (Page 5-7). The processing
status will not be displayed.
5 6 To use the batch backup file (*.iva), select yyFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the
image will be displayed.
a registered image.
The selection screen for the image type opens. zz
Operating/Adjusting
For Outline tool

Select an option for [Image Type] and click the
[OK] button.
The IVA image history selection screen or the

IVA master image selection screen opens.
Select an image and click the [OK] button.
zz
For Color Area tool (color type)
Select an
image
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click the

color to be the reference of judgment, or click
the [+]/[-] button for color extraction settings to
expand/reduce the color range to be extracted.

yyTo change the color of extraction target, click
the [Clear] button and click the color to be

zz
For Area tool (monochrome type) 10 Click the [Yes] button and register the
images repeatedly.
yyIf using the batch backup file (*.iva), repeat

steps 6 to 9.
yyIf using the image capture file (*.ivp), repeat
If the extraction range is inappropriate, click
steps 5 to 9. 5
y
y Registering one or more OK images and NG
Operating/Adjusting
images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.

11 After the registration is completed, click
the [No] button on the confirmation dialog.
yyTo change brightness of extraction target,
click the [Clear] button and click brightness
Tool Auto Tuning.
to be the reference of judgment again.
8 Click the [Registration] button.
The changes in settings after the auto tuning

will be displayed.
to change the tool settings or the image to be
registered.
9 Check the changes in settings and click

the [OK] button.
Changed settings

image appears.

Confirming or deleting the images Deleting the OK/NG images

registered for the Tool Auto Tuning
Confirm or delete the OK/NG images registered for 1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto
Tuning.
the Tool Auto Tuning.
Confirming the OK/NG images
2 Select the image for deletion.
1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto
Tuning.
5 “Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17) Select the
image
2 Select the image for confirmation.

Operating/Adjusting
Select the
3 Click the [Delete] button.
image
3 Click the [Show] button.

The confirmation dialog to delete appears.

Image is deleted and Tool Auto Tuning is
performed again.
The system returns to the main screen of Tool
The display screen opens.
Auto Tuning by clicking the [OK] button.
4 Confirm the selected image.

Judgment value
and status result
for the registered
image
5 After the confirmation is completed, click

the [Close] button.
Tool Auto Tuning.

Confirming the registration results Tool Auto Tuning by the previous

in the test mode registration information
You can perform the test operation and confirm the When the previous Tool Auto Tuning information
status result with Tool Auto Tuning. (registration data file (*.ivm)) is used, the Tool Auto
Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG
1 Open the main screen for the Tool Auto image registration process.
Tuning. It is useful for re-adjusting the tool settings and
“Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning” (Page 5-17) repeating the Tool Auto Tuning.
2 Click the [Test Running] button. Registration data file (*.ivm)

5
Operating/Adjusting
Perform tuning by loading the
The Text Running screen opens. OK/NG images registered in the
previous Tool Auto Tuning
3 Confirm the status result with Tool Auto
Tuning.
Judgment value
and status result
for test operation
(Page 5-3)
2 Click the [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button.

4 After the confirmation is completed, click
the [Close] button.
Tool Auto Tuning.
The import confirmation dialog for registration

information file (*.ivm) appears.
The screen to select a file opens.

4 Select a registration data file to load (*.ivm) 8 To add images, click the [Perform Image
and click the [Open] button. Registration] button and register the OK/
NG images.
“Registering the OK/NG images to be used

[Exit] button.
5 The previous information will be re-adjusted and

the modified contents will be displayed.
Operating/Adjusting
5 Check the changes in settings and click

the [OK] button.
The confirmation dialog whether or not to save
the settings appears.
Changed settings 10 Click the [Yes] button.

11 To save the registered image to the

registration information file (*.ivm), click
The message loading completion appears.
the [Yes] button.
6 Click the [OK] button. The save as screen opens.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program]
if you click the [No] button.
12 Select an arbitrary folder and click the

[Save] button.
The image will be saved, and the system
7 If multiple tools are set in the program, returns to the main screen in [Program].
select the target tool for the Tool Auto
Tuning and click the [OK] button.
Select the tool
The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning

opens.
“The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning”
(Page 5-16)

Stabilizing the Judgment Process
This section explains how to adjust the device Stabilizing the judgment process by
when the judgment process is not stable.
taking a clear image of the target
To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary
to take clear image of the target and adjust the Adjusts so that the images which can clearly
detection tool such that it functions in a stable recognize differences between high and low-
manner. quality-target by the detection tools can be imaged.
yyStabilize the judgment process by clearly imaging

Imaging the target widely
the target (Page 5-29)
- Adjust the installation distance to image the The judgment process stabilizes by taking a large
target widely image of the target onto the screen.
- Correct the distorted image due to the

Adjusting the installed distance (WD) 5
installation
Install the sensor close to the target.
Operating/Adjusting
- Make the image bright enough
Install the sensor at the appropriate distance
- Focus well
from the target upon checking the field of view
- Make the image slur less
and the installed distance of the sensor.
- Make the glossy or metal surface shine less
“Checking the view and installed distance”
- Adjust the color tint (for color type only)
(Page 2-2)
- Make the image less influenced by the lighting
condition ¡ : Adequate × : Inadequate
yyStabilize by adjusting the position gap of the
target (Page 5-33)
yyStabilize the position adjustment (Page 5-34)
yyStabilize the Outline tool (Page 5-35)
yyStabilize the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-36)
If the judgment process is adjusted to make it

stabilize, the process time may become longer
depending on the function used. Adjust the
judgment process while confirming the balance
within the process time.

Using the digital zooming function
For the monochrome type, the target can
be imaged larger using the digital zooming
function.
“Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)”
(Page 4-18)

Correcting the distorted images due to Achieving adequate image brightness

the installation If the image is too dark, the judgment process for
If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due
due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright, the
prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the target judgment process may become unstable.
image may become trapezoidally distorted. Brightness can be adjusted with Automatic
The tilt correction corrects these images and Brightness Adjustment.
displays them without distortion. “Brightness
��
Adjustment” (Page 4-11)
“Tilt Correction” (Page 6-40)
5 Indicator light
If brightness cannot be adjusted in
the Automatic Brightness Adjustment
Operating/Adjusting
Finer brightness adjustments can be made in

Advanced Brightness Adjustment.
Top view “Brightness
��
Target
Target
Lateral view
Before tilt After tilt correction

correction (vertical) zz
Imaging Mode
When “High Gain” is selected in the imaging
mode, the brightness amplification factor
increases resulting in a brighter screen.
zz
Brightness
Setting a higher brightness value gives a longer
exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen.

If brightness cannot be adjusted due
to uneven brightness
Refer to “Reducing the shininess of the
glossy or metal surface” (Page 5-32).

Achieving good focus Reducing the image blur

Adjusting the focus is required to clearly image If the image is blurred by imaging a moving target,
of the target. For the auto focus type, focus can the image blurring can be corrected by shortening
be adjusted easily with the Automatic Focus the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust the
Adjustment. For the manual focus type, the focus exposure time with the brightness adjustment.
can be adjusted while confirming the image and “Brightness
��
focus indicator.
“Focus
��

If good focus cannot be achieved by 5
the Automatic Focus Adjustment
Operating/Adjusting
The focusing position may not be adjusted
correctly if the image is too dark or too
bright. Adjust to the applicable brightness
with Automatic Brightness Adjustment (Page
4-11) and then perform the Automatic Focus
Adjustment.
If the focus still cannot be adjusted with the
Automatic Focus Adjustment for the auto focus Exposure Time
type, adjust the focus manually.
“When the focusing position is to be
zz
Imaging Mode
Select [High Gain] in the imaging mode so that
adjusted manually” (Page 4-14)
the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen
becomes brighter so that the exposure time can
be shortened and the image blurring can be
reduced. The image noise may increase.
Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the
[HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.
zz
Brightness
When the value of brightness is reduced, the
exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a
less blurry image.
By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing

filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened
as the exposure time can be shortened.
Adjust the focus position by the slider.

Reducing the shininess of the glossy

Using the polarizing filter attachment
or metal surface Use the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/
OP-87437). The optical characteristics of the
Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in
polarizing filter attachment cut off the mirror
light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a
reflection and reduce the shine on the target’s
high-light intensity, the amount of light received will
surface.
be saturated and the surface will shine. This section
“Using the polarizing filter attachment”
explains how to reduce the shininess.
(Page 2-7)

Using the Automatic Brightness
Installing the sensor at an angle
5 Adjustment The built-in lighting will not reflected back into
the camera, so the shine on the target’s surface
If the target shines, the HDR function is
Operating/Adjusting
enabled automatically and it can be reduced by can be reduced.

performing Automatic brightness adjustment. This is effective for flat-surface targets.
The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is When the sensor is When the sensor is
a function that prevents light saturation in the installed in front of installed at an angle
shining area by imaging the target with a wider the target from the target
dynamic range. The HDR function can also be
adjusted manually.

Using the dome attachment
Use the dome attachment (IV-D10).
The dome attachment emits even diffused light
from the entire circumference to the target, so
that the contrast becomes less and the shine on
the target’s surface is reduced.
This is effective for targets of all shapes.
��
“Using the dome attachment” (Page 2-6) The mirror reflection The mirror reflection
of the built-in light of the built-in light
reflects into the does not reflect into
camera and causes the camera so no
the surface to shine. surface shine occurs.
If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor,

Dome
attachment
the image can be corrected by the tilt
correction function.
Diffusion “Tilt Correction” (Page 6-40)
light
Target

Adjusting the color tint (for color type Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned
only) target position
Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning
type image is different from that of the target. of the target, the position to be judged is also declined
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 6-42) from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The detection can be stabilized by using the
position adjusting function.
Reducing the effect of illumination “Position
��
Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)
variation
If the detection is not stable due to the ambient
Tool settings 5
light from the surroundings where the sensor is Master image
Operating/Adjusting
installed, the effect of the illumination variation can
be reduced by the brightness correction function.
If the detection cannot be stabilized with the
brightness correction function, use a shielding
around the sensor to prevent from the ambient
light.
“Brightness
��
Correction” (Page 4-25)
Tool window

Processing during an operation
Tool window

Stabilizing the position adjustment

If the target tilts and the position
adjustment becomes unstable
This section explains how to adjust when the position
Search region
adjustment is not stable.
Rotation range
“Position
��
Adjustment tool” (Page 4-53)

Basic adjustments
Set the position adjustment window as large
as possible by selecting a part that contains a
unique shape.
If there are many variation of a target shapes
5 that a position adjustment window has been set,

set the threshold which has lower matching rate.
¡ : Good example
zz
Rotation range
Operating/Adjusting
yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the

target exceeds the rotation range (default
value: ± 20°).
“Rotation
��
Range” (Page 4-59)
yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool
window will search with the range ± few
degrees wider than the setting value of rotation
range. (The tool window will search ± few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
Since the convex part assigned in the position to detect the target in accordance with the set
adjustment window does not exist in any other rotation angle of the target.
part of the target, the position adjustment can “Margin”
��
(Page 4-59)
be performed correctly without being recognition
error. zz
Search region
Broaden the search region if the variation in the
× : Bad example
position determining of the target exceeds the
region to be searched.
Example 1
“Setting
��
a search region” (Page 4-57)
Example 2

If the position adjustment becomes
unstable due to the effect of the
unwanted outlines
Position adjustment window yyThe outline disabling function can disable
The position adjustment cannot function unwanted outlines.
correctly in the following examples. “Settings
��
for disabling outlines” (Page 4-58)
Example 1: The straight line that the position yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
adjustment window is set cannot be
“Setting
��
a sensitivity” (Page 4-57)
identified uniquely because there
are many similar straight lines exist
in other parts of the target.
Example 2: The angle section that the position
adjustment window is set cannot
be identified uniquely because
there are many similar angle
sections exist in other parts of the
target.


If the outline of the reference target Stabilizing the Outline tool
cannot be detected
This section explains how to adjust the outline tool
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline
when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets
may not be extracted. Set the extraction
is not stable.
sensitivity to [High].
“Outline
��
tool” (Page 4-34)
“Setting
��
a sensitivity” (Page 4-57)
If the process remain unstable even after setting
Basic adjustments
the extraction sensitivity to [Hi Sensitivity], it is yySet the tool window as large as possible by
necessary to adjust the exposure condition for selecting a part contains a unique shape.
the target. yyIf the same or similar shapes are misrecognized,
“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking set the search region so that no outlines are 5
a clear image of the target” (Page 5-29) searched beyond the target area.
Operating/Adjusting
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may “Setting
��
become stable by using the color filter. yyAdjust the threshold to the average of the
high and low-quality-target. The judgment
“Color filters (color type only)” (Page 4-18)
condition and threshold can also be optimized
automatically to the most appropriate condition
and value by using the Tool Auto Tuning.

If the outline cannot be detected when
the target becomes out of position
Adjusts the search region. Broaden the search
region if the varies of the position determining of
the target exceeds the region to be searched.
“Setting
��

If the detection becomes unstable due
to the effect of the unwanted outline
other than the target
yyThe outline disabling function can disable
unwanted outlines.
“Settings
��
for removing outlines” (Page 4-38)
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
��
“Setting a sensitivity” (Page 4-37)
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
��
yySet the search algorithm to [High].
��
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-40)
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
making the target background plain, etc.


If the target tilts and the outline Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool
cannot be detected
This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/
yyAdjusts the rotation range. Broaden the
Area tool when the judgment for the high and low-
rotation range if the tilt of the target exceeds
the rotation range (default value: ± 20°). quality-target is not stable.
“Rotation
��
Range” (Page 4-39) “Color
��
Area/Area tool” (Page 4-42)
yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will
search with the range ± few degrees wider
than the setting value of rotation range. (The
Basic adjustments
tool window will search ± few degrees even if Adjust the threshold to the average of the high
the rotation range is set to 0°.) and low-quality-target. The color extraction
5 Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
to detect the target in accordance with the set
range, brightness extraction range and
threshold can also be optimized automatically
rotation angle of the target.
Operating/Adjusting
to the most appropriate ranges and values by

“Margin”
��
(Page 4-40)
using the Tool Auto Tuning.

If the match rate difference between the “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment”
high and low-quality-targets is small (Page 5-14)
Adjusts the search algorithm. If there is no “Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
difference between the match rate for high and the Judgment Condition)” (Page 5-15)
low-quality-target, select the [Hi accuracy]. This
will result in better judgment accuracy. However,

If the color you wish to judge cannot
the processing time becomes longer. be extracted
“Search
��
Algorithm” (Page 4-40)
yyClick and extract the color or brightness to be

If the outline of the target cannot be the reference for judgment.
detected yyBy repeatedly clicking the un-extracted color or
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline brightness, the extraction range can be added.
may not be extracted. Set the extraction yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction
sensitivity to [High]. range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons).
“Setting
��
a sensitivity” (Page 4-37) Click the [+] button to expand the color or
If the process remain unstable even after brightness range currently being extracted.
setting the extraction sensitivity to [High Click the [-] button to reduce the range.
Sensitivity], it is necessary to adjust the “Setting
��
the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-44)
exposure condition for the target. yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable].
“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
“Extended Functions of the Color Area/
a clear image of the target” (Page 5-29) Area tool” (Page 4-50)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
become stable by using the color filter.

If the area search becomes unstable
“Color filters (color type only)” (Page 4-18) due to unwanted colors being extracted
Adjusts with the mask function. The region in
which unwanted colors are extracted can be
masked.
“Mask
��
settings” (Page 4-47)

Shortening the Processing Time
This section explains how to adjust the device to For the processing time
shorten the processing time.
To shorten the processing time, perform The processing time is the period of time from when
an external or internal trigger is received until the
adjustments to shorten the processing times of the
status result is finalized.
imaging process and the detection tools. Processing time is displayed in the statistical information.
yyShorten the imaging processing time (Page 5-38) “Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10)
yyShorten the processing time of the detection tools
(Page 5-38)
yyShorten the processing time of the Outline tool
(Page 5-38)
yyShorten the processing time of the Color Area/
Area tool (Page 5-39)
5
Operating/Adjusting
yyShorten the processing time of the position
adjustment (Page 5-39)

Flow of the internal process
If the processing time is shortened, the stability of
judgment may decrease. The processing time should Trigger input
therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining
balance with the stability of the judgment process.
Imaging
(Tilt Correction)
(Brightness
Correction)
(Position
Processing time
Adjustment)
Tool 1 process
Tool 2 process
Tool n process
Status output
Methods to shorten the processing time are as follows.

yyShortening the imaging processing time.
yyShortening the processing time of each tool.
yyDo not use correction functions
(tilt correction, brightness correction, and
position adjustment).
yyDo not use the FTP client function.
yyDo not use a field network.
Shortening the imaging processing Shortening the processing time of

time each tool
zz
Imaging Aarea
The processing time can be shortened by
Shortening the processing time of the
adjusting the imaging area.
Outline tool
Entire imaging area (default value) The processing time can be shortened by adjusting
Reduce the imaging area the settings for the search region, rotation range,
and search algorithm.
Search region
5 Rotation range
Operating/Adjusting
Non-imaged area
Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging
area from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial]. The
processing time for capturing the image in non-
zz
Search region
imaged area can be shortened. The importing The searching time can be shortened by
time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical reducing the search region and setting the
direction (V). region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Make sure that the range of position determining
“Imaging
��
Area” (Page 4-17)
of the target does not exceed the search region.
zz
Exposure time “Setting
��
The processing time can be shortened by zz
Rotation range
shortening the exposure time (Page 4-11). The The target search time while rotating the master
longer exposure time makes the processing image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: ± 20°).
time longer than the displayed exposure time. Make sure that the range of an installation angle
of the target does not exceed the rotation range.
“Rotation
��
By unmounting the dome attachment or
polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time
zz
Search algorithm
Select [Hi speed]. This will decrease the
can be shortened.
judgment accuracy, but the processing time will
be shorter.
“Search
��
Algorithm” (Page 4-40)
Selecting the tool
zz
Producing an image with less unwanted
The processing time of the Color Area/Area tool outlines
will be shorter than the Outline tool. Therefore, you The processing time becomes longer for images
should select the Color Area/Area tool whenever with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
possible. target outlines.
“Setting
��

Shortening the processing time of the Shortening the processing time of the
Color Area/Area tool position adjustment
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting When the position adjustment is used, the processing
the window shape settings. time can be shortened by adjusting the search region
or rotation range settings.
Window shape Search region
Rotation range
Operating/Adjusting
zz
Window shape
If the current window shape is [Entire], reduce zz
Search region
the window shape by modifying the setting to The searching time can be shortened by
[Rect] or [Circle]. reducing the search region and setting the
The processing time can be shortened by region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Note that the range of the target position that
reducing the time required for the area
the position adjustment function can correct
processing. becomes narrower.
“Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-44) “Setting
��
zz
Rotation range
The target search time while rotating the master
image can be shortened by reducing the
rotation range (default value: ± 20°).
Note that the range of the target angle that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
“Rotation
��
zz
Producing an image with less unwanted
outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images
with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
“Setting
��

MEMO
5
Operating/Adjusting

6
This chapter explains the useful features and
operations of the sensor and IV-Navigator, the
Useful Features/ Program Details screen, the Sensor's internal
Various Functions image history screen, the I/O Settings screen, and
the Advanced screen.
Also, explains the operation of the menu bar.
List of the Useful Features................................6-2

Changeover for a Target
(Program Functions)..........................................6-6
Sensor's Internal Image History
(Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG).............................6-15
6
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images........6-21
Useful Features/Various Functions

Setting the Input and
Output Information of the Sensor...................6-26
Setting the Advanced Information of
the Sensor.........................................................6-30
Operating from the menu bar..........................6-45
Converting IVP Data to BMP Data
Using the IVP-Converter..................................6-51

List of the Useful Features
Useful features while running
Reference
Items Things you want to do Useful functions Description
page
Up to 32 types (products) of
Change over the program Program function products can be registered 6-6
and loaded.
Assign a name to the settings
A name can be assigned to
of each product for easy Program function 6-12
the used program.
identification
Operation Misoperation can be
Prevent misoperation by the
Password Lock prevented by setting a 6-34
operator
password on the screen.
6 Assign a name to each

sensor for easy identification
Device Name
A device name and a study name
can be assigned to the sensor.
6-31
Automatically register the External master Registers the master image

6-26
master image registration from external input.
The latest 100 images (in
color) or 300 images (in
Automatically save and Sensor’s internal
monochrome) can be saved 6-15
confirm the NG images image history
into the memory of the sensor
and confirmed them.
Confirm the image history in The image history can be
the sensor saved as a batch Simulator confirmed by using a batch 7-1
backup file (*.iva). backup file (*.iva).
Save a sensor image
The sensor images and the
displayed on the IV-Navigator
IV-Navigator’s screen can be
into the PC Save Image 6-22
saved by clicking the [Save
Capture the IV-Navigator’s Image] button.
screen
The statistical data of the
Check the operation status Statistical process
Analysis processing times and results 5-10
statistically screen
can be confirmed.
The status result of each
Check the operation status
Histogram screen tool can be displayed in the 5-12
with a histogram
histogram screen.
Automatically save data Data of the images captured

of the images captured by by the sensor and the status
the sensor and the status FTP client function result information can be 6-36
result information outside the automatically transferred to
sensor an FTP server.
Image data in IVP format
individually saved in the
Convert image files in IVP
IVP-Converter image history or saved by 6-51
format to BMP format in batch
FTP transfer can be converted
to BMP format in batch.

Reference
page
The zoom ratio can be
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Zoom in/out the images changed to 100%/125%/150%/ 3-11
button
200%/300%/500%.
The language can be changed
to Japanese, English, 3-2
Change the display language Language
Deutsch, Chinese (Simplified), 6-49
or Chinese (Traditional).
Display The [Manual Trigger] button
Manual Trigger displayed when the external
Hide the trigger button 6-48
button trigger is selected can be
switched to show/hide.
If the image does not need to
Make the screen update Image while be displayed, the screen update
6-48
6
faster Running can become faster by setting to

display the status result only.
Useful features during installation/adjustment
Reference
page
Adjusts the sensor installation
Stabilize the judgment. - 5-29
and the settings navigator.
Judgment Shorten the process time - Adjusts the settings navigator. 5-37
process Issue an internal trigger and
perform judgment process - Sets the trigger interval to 1ms. 8-3
within the shortest cycle
Adjust the threshold for the The threshold can be set
Inspection Tool
Threshold detection by using the saved automatically by selecting an 5-15
Auto Tuning
images image and specifying to OK or NG.
The light can be set to stay lit
Prevent the internal lighting Lighting Mode
at all times by synchronizing 4-19
from blinking (Continuous)
with the trigger.
The distorted images due to
Correct the distorted images
the limitations for the sensor
due to being taken from an Tilt Correction 6-40
installation can be corrected
Imaging angle
and displayed correctly.
Adjust the color tint (white The color tint can be adjusted
White Balance 6-42
balance) and displayed correctly.
The image of a target can be
Correct the images of a Image display
rotated 180° without adjusting 6-43
target that are rotated 180° direction
the sensor's position.

Reference
page
The settings can be confirmed
Confirm/edit the settings without
Simulator or edited by using a batch 7-1
connecting to the sensor.
backup files (*.iva).
Read all the settings for the
Back up the settings to the
Batch Backup sensor and those can be 6-21
PC
saved into the PC.
The batch backup data stored
Copy the settings to multiple Transfer Program
into the PC can be transferred 6-23
sensors Settings
to another sensor.
The settings of a set program
6 number which has been set

can be copied to another
6-12
Copy the settings and use program number.
the settings to set another Program function

Settings product The settings for a specific set
program number which have
6-13
been saved in the batch backup
file (*.iva) can be imported.
The list of settings can be
Confirm the settings of the
Export confirmed with Microsoft Excel 6-45
sensor with the list.
etc.
Initialize the settings of the The settings can be initialized
Initialize Sensor 6-44
sensor to the factory default.
The version for the model or
Confirm the version of the
Sensor Information the operation software can be 6-31
sensor
confirmed.
Confirm the version The version of the IV-Navigator
Version information 6-50
information of the IV-Navigator. can be confirmed.

Reference
page
Confirm whether or not the The operation test for the
input and output line are I/O Monitor input and output line can be 6-28
correctly wired performed.
The polarity can be changed
Switch to NPN output or PNP
I/O Polarity to NPN or PNP according to 6-28
output
the control unit currently used.
Switch the output to N.O. or The settings for each OUT can
Output format 6-27
N.C. be changed to N.O. or N.C.
Output the status output with The output can be changed from
Output Type 6-27
one-shot level output to one-shot output.
Output the status output with Common Output On-delay time can be set for
6-27 6
on-delay Settings the one-shot output.

Rising trigger or falling trigger
Switch the external trigger to
Input Assignment can be selected as the 6-26
I/O line rise or fall
operation of the external trigger
When the total status result
Total status NG of each detection tool was
Output the NG status results 4-61
output NG, the total status NG output
function turns ON.
When the sensor is running
Confirm whether or not the
RUN output with no system error occurring, 4-61
sensor is running properly
the output function turns ON.
Logical operation result of each
Form a logical operation of
Logic output detection tool can be assigned 4-64
status result
to the output function.
The total status conditions can
Change the total status Total status be selected from [All Tools OK]/
4-64
conditions conditions [Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic
4].

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Overview of the program functions Things can be performed with the

The sensor can save the judgment condition set in program functions
the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types yySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment
(32 products). conditions (programs).
By reading the judgment condition which has been “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
saved according to each product, changeover can Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)
be done easily.
yyReads and operates the saved program.
Sensor “Using the program functions
(changing over)” (Page 6-9)
PROG31 : Product XX
••• yySelects the reading method of the program.
6 PROG02 : Product C
yyNames the judgment conditions (programs).
PROG01 : Product B
“Editing a program name” (Page 6-12)
PROG00 : Product A
yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions
Settings Navigator (programs).
*1
yyImaging settings “Copying a program” (Page 6-12)
yyMaster image
yyTool settings
*2
yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to
yyOutput Assignment the status before setting.
“Initializing a program” (Page 6-14)
Sensor Advanced
yyEnvironmental
yySetup Adjustment
yySwitching programs
*1 The auto focus type includes the focusing

position.
*2 Including the threshold of each tool.

Preparing the program functions Preparation procedures

Registers the judgment condition for each product
to the program before running. 1 Display the main screen in [Program].
Preparation flow (Page 5-3)
(1) Select a program number 2 Select a program number to register a

Select a program number to register a judgment judgment condition of a product.
condition from PROG00 to PROG31.
Select the program
(2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings
Navigator
Set the judgment condition for a product in the
Settings Navigator.
6
(3) Select a program switch method

The switching method can be selected from the
following items.
yySwitching from the external input line.
yySelecting the program from the main screen in
[Run].
The program can also be selected from the
yyDisplaying the Program Details screen and
[Detail] button (Page 6-11).
selecting the program.
yySwitching from a field network
For the details of the procedure for switching 3 Set a judgment condition in the Sensor
Setup screen.
from a field network, refer to “IV Series
User’s Manual (Field Network)”.
The following functions can be used with the

preparations for the program function.
yyThe product name can be registered to the
program.
“Editing a program name” (Page 6-12)
yyTo register a similar product, the program can “Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
be copied, and then the settings can be edited. Judgment Condition)” (Page 4-1)
“Copying a program” (Page 6-12)
yySettings can be changed after importing the 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs
program in the batch backup file. for the number of products that are to be
“Importing a program” (Page 6-13) changed over.
yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition
registered in the program to the status before
setting.
“Initializing a program” (Page 6-14)

5 To switch the program by inputting a

signal from the PLC etc. to the input line
of the sensor, place a check mark to
the [Enable program switching through
external input] check box and set the
function of the input line.
Set the function of

the input line
6

The bit to be set differs depending on the
product numbers to be registered.
Product numbers to
bit to be assigned to
be registered
the input line
(Program numbers)
2 bit0
3 to 4 bit0/bit1
5 to 8 bit0/bit1/bit2
9 to 16 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3
17 to 32 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4
Setup example
When 7 types of products are to be registered,
bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN
terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned.

Using the program functions When switching the program in the

(changing over) Program Details screen
When switching the program in the 1 Start the run mode.

main screen in [Run] “Starting
��
an Operation” (Page 5-2)
1 Start the run mode. 2 Display the Program Details screen.

“[File] menu” (Page 6-45)
“Starting
��
2 Select a program number that the product 3 judged is registered, and click the [Change
Select a program that the product to be
to be judged is registered.
Program] button.
Select the
6
Select the program
program

4 Start the run mode with the new program
The program number can also be selected number by clicking the [OK] button.
while confirming a master image with the
[Detail] button (Page 6-11).
3 Start the run mode with the new program

number by clicking the [OK] button.
For details of switching from the dedicated monitor,

refer to the “IV Series User's Manual (Monitor)”.

When switching the program by the external input
1 Start the run mode.

“Starting
��
2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is registered with the status
of the input line.
Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-26)
to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number.
Program bit4 bit0 Program bit4 bit0
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit3 bit2 bit1
number (MSB) (LSB) number (MSB) (LSB)
PROG00 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PROG16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
6 PROG01 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON PROG17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON

PROG02 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF PROG18 ON OFF OFF ON OFF
PROG03 OFF OFF OFF ON ON PROG19 ON OFF OFF ON ON

PROG04 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF PROG20 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
PROG05 OFF OFF ON OFF ON PROG21 ON OFF ON OFF ON
PROG06 OFF OFF ON ON OFF PROG22 ON OFF ON ON OFF
PROG07 OFF OFF ON ON ON PROG23 ON OFF ON ON ON
PROG08 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF PROG24 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
PROG09 OFF ON OFF OFF ON PROG25 ON ON OFF OFF ON
PROG10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF PROG26 ON ON OFF ON OFF
PROG11 OFF ON OFF ON ON PROG27 ON ON OFF ON ON
PROG12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF PROG28 ON ON ON OFF OFF
PROG13 OFF ON ON OFF ON PROG29 ON ON ON OFF ON
PROG14 OFF ON ON ON OFF PROG30 ON ON ON ON OFF
PROG15 OFF ON ON ON ON PROG31 ON ON ON ON ON
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [NPN] ON : The state shorted with 0 V line
OFF : Open
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [PNP] ON : The state that voltage is applied
OFF : Open
For details of the controlling method and the timing

chart, refer to “Changing Over” (Page 8-7).

Displaying the Program Details (3) [Initialize] button

Initializes the set items in the program and
screen
resets to the default.
This section explains the Program Details screen “Initializing a program” (Page 6-14)
displayed when the [Detail] button is clicked on the
(4) Thumbnail images
main screen of the IV-Navigator.
Displays a program number, program name,
and thumbnail image.
When the Program Details screen opens by
clicking the [Detail] button on the main screen in (5) Program name
[Run], only the [Change Program] button can be Displays a program name of an magnified
clicked. image.
(6) [Edit] button
1 Display the main screen in [Run] or Edits a program name of the selected program.
[Program].
“Editing a program name” (Page 6-12) 6
(7) Tool list

(Page 5-3)
Displays a tool list which has been set in the
2 Click the [Detail] button. selected program.
Displays a frame of the tool window on the
magnified image with a thick line by selecting
the tool. Also, displays a frame of the search
region in light blue.
(8) Image display screen
Magnifies the selected thumbnail image.
The Program Details screen opens. (9) [Change Program] button

The displayed items are as follows. Switches a program to be used to the program
of the selected thumbnail image.
(1) (2) (3)
“When switching the program in the Program
Details screen” (Page 6-9)
(4) (10) [Close] button
(6) The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or
(5)
(7) [Program].
(8) (9) (10)
(1) [Copy] button

Copies a set program to another program
number.
“Copying a program” (Page 6-12)
(2) [Import from File] button
Imports a program from the batch backup file.
“Importing a program” (Page 6-13)

Editing a program name Copying a program

Edits the program name of the selected program. Copies a set program to another program number.
A new program can be created by reusing the
1 Display the main screen in [Program]. settings which has been set.
(Page 5-3) 1 Display the main screen in [Program].
2 Display the Program Details screen. (Page 5-3)
“Displaying the Program Details screen”
(Page 6-11) 2 Display the Program Details screen.
3 Select the program to change the program (Page 6-11)
name and click the [Edit] button.
6 Select the 3 Select the program to be copied and click
program the [Copy] button.
Select the
program
The screen to edit the program name opens.
4 Input any name and click the [OK] button.

4 Select the program of the copy destination
and click the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Program details

screen. Select the
program
If the display language (Page 6-49) is changed, The copy source program is copied to the copy
the program name might be replaced and destination.
displayed as hyphens (-).

Importing a program 6 From the program saved in the batch

backup file, select a program to be the
Imports one program from the batch backup file. importing source.
A new program can be created by reusing the
settings of the imported program.
1 Display the main screen in [Program].

(Page 5-3)
2 Display the Program Details screen.

(Page 6-11) 7 Select a program of the importing
3 Select the program to be copied and click
destination and click the [OK] button.
6
the [Import from File] button

The program of the import source will be
imported to the importing destination.
4 Click the button.
5 Select a batch backup file to be the

importing source of a program and click
the [Open] button.

Initializing a program
Initializes settings in the program and resets to the
default.
1 Display the main screen in [Program].

(Page 5-3)
2 Display the Program Details screen.

(Page 6-11)
3 Select the program to be initialized and

6 click the [Initialize] button.
Select the
program
The system returns to the Program details

screen.
The deleted program will be [No Master Image].

Sensor's Internal Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
Sensor's Internal Image History

(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition,
it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows.
yyNG Only (default value).....Saves the images whose total status result was NG.
yyAll.......................................Saves all the images that were judged.
Loads the saved images into the PC and the images can be used for confirming the causes and tendency
of the NG result.
The numbers of images can be saved are as follows.
yyColor type.................... 100 images
yyMonochrome type........ 300 images
The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows.
yyColor type.................... 70 images
yyMonochrome type........ 210 images
6
Since the memory of the sensor’s internal image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the

power is turned OFF.
To save an image, select the [File] → [Batch Backup] from the menu bar, and then perform batch backup.

Displaying the Sensor's internal image history screen

This section explains how to display the Sensor’s internal image history screen.
There are two methods for displaying the Sensor’s internal image history screen.
[Logging Settings] can be set only when it is selected on the main screen in [Program].

Displaying from the main screen in [Run]
Displaying from the main screen in
[Program]
1 Click the [Image Hist] button in the main
screen in [Run]. 1 Click the [Image Hist] button in the main
screen in [Program].
6
The Logging pause confirmation screen opens.

Select whether or not to pause. The Sensor’s internal image history screen opens.
When the operation is not pausing

yyThe added or overwritten history image will
not be updated automatically. To update, click
the [Refresh] button.
yyWhen the history image is erased by
overwriting and updating in the sensor
during display on the monitor, it may not be
displayed again on the monitor.

The Sensor’s internal image history screen opens.

Loading and confirming the saved images

Display the image history saved in the built-in memory of the sensor.
Use the simulator (Page 7-1) for confirmation of the image history saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).
1 Display the Sensor’s internal image history screen.

“Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history screen” (Page 6-16)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6)
(7) (11)
(8)
(12)
6

(9)
(10) (13)
(1) Filter (4) [Delete All] button

Select the image history type to be displayed Clears the image histories saved in the sensor.
from [All]/[NG Only]/[OK Only]. “Clearing the saved images” (Page 6-19)
(2) [Save All Images] button (5) [Logging Settings] button
Saves all the image histories saved in the Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for
sensor to the individual file (*.bmp and *.ivp) or the image history.
batch backup file (*.iva). “Changing the logging conditions of the
“Saving all the image histories individually” image history” (Page 6-20)
(Page 6-18) (6) Thumbnail images
“Backing up the image history in a batch” (Page 6-19) Displays the number of triggers, total status
result, and thumbnail image.
To back up the images in a batch from
the View screen, the saving target will be
For details of the number of triggers, refer
[Prog.+Image Hist.].
to “Displaying the statistical information”
(3) [Refresh] button (Page 5-10).
Displayed if the [Continue Logging] is selected
when the image history is to be displayed from
the main screen in [Run].
Clears the image history displayed on the IV-
Navigator, and then acquires and displays the
latest image history in the sensor.

(7) Trigger number Saving all the image histories

Displays the number of triggers of the magnified
individually
history image.
Saves all the image histories saved in the sensor to
the individual file (*.bmp and *.ivp).
In the following cases, characters of the trigger
number are displayed in gray.
yyImages which the tool settings was changed 1 Display the Sensor’s internal image
history screen.
after image history saving
yyWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been performed “Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history
Moreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] / [Process] screen” (Page 6-16)
is selected for Tool View (Page 5-7), only
the tool window is displayed and the process 2 Click the [Save All Images] button and select
contents are not displayed. the [Save all images one by one (*.bmp,*ivp)].
6 (8) Total status result

Displays the total status result of the magnified
history image in OK or NG.

(9) Magnified display screen
Magnifies the selected thumbnail image.
“Basic Operation for Tools” (Page 3-11)
(10) Program number The Browse For Folder screen opens.
Displays a program number of the Sensor's
internal image history currently displayed. 3 Specify an arbitrary saving destination
(11) [Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button
Performs a Tool Auto Tuning based on the
magnified history image.
(12) Tool list
Displays a tool list which has been set in the
program of the history image. The tool will be
displayed on the image according to the settings of
the tool display (Page 5-7) by selecting the tool. The save completion message appears.
(13) [Close] button

Saves all files at the same time. To save
The system returns to the main screen in [Run] or
individually, save it with the [Save Image]
[Program].
button of the image tool bar (Page 3-11).
The system returns to the Sensor's internal

image history screen.

Backing up the image history in a batch Clearing the saved images

Saves all the image histories saved in the sensor to Clears the image histories saved in the sensor.
the batch backup file (*.iva).
1 Display the Sensor’s internal image
1 Display the Sensor’s internal image history screen.
history screen. “Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history
“Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history screen” (Page 6-16)
screen” (Page 6-16)
2 Click the [Delete All] button.
2 Click the [Save All Images] button and
select the [Batch Backup (*.iva)].

The Batch Backup screen opens. 3 Click the [Yes] button.

The image history will be cleared.
3 Click the [Go] button.
4 Click the [Close] button.
4 Click the [Save] button.

The system returns to the main screen in [Run]
or [Program].
Change a saving destination of the file and file

name as needed.
The backup completion message appears.


Changing the logging conditions of

the image history
Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for
the image history.
1 Display the Sensor’s internal image

history screen.
Display the Sensor's internal image history

screen from the main screen in [Program].
[Logging Settings] can be set only when it is
selected on the main screen in [Program].
6 “Displaying the Sensor’s internal image history

screen” (Page 6-16)
2 Click the [Logging Settings] button.
3 Select a logging condition.
yyAll......................Saves all the images to the

image history regardless of
the status result.
yyNG Only............ Only saves the images whose
status result is NG to the
image history.


Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
Backs up the data saved in the sensor, transfers 4 Click the [Go] button.
the setting data, and captures an image.
yyTo back up all the images of the image
Saving the sensor settings or the history in addition to the sensor settings
image history (Sensor Setup (Settings Navigator) and
extended functions of all programs), place a
check mark to the [Save Image History]
Backing up in a batch check box.
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in yyWhen the image history has been saved in
a batch. [Run], the image being the saving object may
When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings be updated and deleted during the batch
backup. A deleted image is not saved. Because
can be copied based on the batch backup data.
of this, saving in [Program] is recommended.
yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup 6

of the data saved in the sensor in case of

malfunction of the product.
yyThe saving time increases when this is
performed in [Program]. Execution while in the
[Run] status is recommended.

1 Display the main screen in [Run] or
[Program].
(Page 5-3)
2 Click the [Advanced] button.
Change a saving destination of the file and file

name as needed.
The backup completion message appears.
3 Select the [Backup] tab and click the
[Batch Backup] button. 6 Click the [OK] button.
[Backup] tab

Settings screen.
The Batch Backup screen opens.

Saving images and screens displayed

Confirming the saving destination of
on the IV-Navigator individually an image
In the screen which displays the [Save Image] 1 Click the [Show saved image file location] button.
button, an image displayed on the IV-Navigator can
be individually saved to the PC. The ivp format file
which can be used for a master image registration
or Tool Auto Tuning will also be saved at the same
time.
The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at the
same time (screenshot).
The screens which displays the [Save Image]
The folder which has been set to the saving
button are as follows.
6 yyMain screen in [Run]
destination opens.
yyMain screen in [Program]

yySettings Navigator
yyLimit Adjustment
yyInspection Tool Auto Tuning
yyProgram Details
yySensor’s internal image history
This section explains the procedure for saving images

Changing the saving destination of an
by using an example of the main screen in [Run]. image

Saving procedure 1 Click the [▼] button and select the
[Change saved image file location].
1 Click the [Save Image] button.
The Browse For Folder screen opens.

The [Image saved] message appears, and the
bmp and ivp format files will be saved to the
2 Specify an arbitrary saving destination
saving destination.

Transferring the backed up settings 3 Select the [Backup] tab and click the
to the sensor [Transfer Program Settings] button.
[Backup] tab
Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved
in the PC to the sensor.
yyOperations cannot be cancelled during

transmission of the settings data.
yyIt is recommended to batch back up the data
saved in the sensor beforehand.
“Saving the sensor settings or the image
history” (Page 6-21) The confirmation dialog appears.
yyThe image data in the image history will not be
transferred. 4 Click the [Yes] button.
yyThe settings file of a different model of the
sensor cannot be transferred.
The screen to select the batch backup file opens.
6
yyThe settings data of auto focus type and 5 Select a batch backup file to be

manual focus type can be transferred mutually. transferred, and click the [Open] button.
However, when the setting data of a manual
focus type are transferred to an auto focus type,
the focusing position will be converted to the
default value.
yyWhen directly connecting the sensor to the PC,
the setting file of the sensor with the FTP client
function or a field network enabled cannot be
transferred.
yyWhen the FTP client function or field network
function is enabled, the setting data cannot be
transferred to the sensor during running.
The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.
1 Display the main screen in [Run] or

[Program].
(Page 5-3)
2 Click the [Advanced] button.

6 Confirm the information of the setting 7 Click the [OK] button.

file to be transferred and click the [Send] The system returns to the Advanced Sensor
button. Settings screen.
When a file was transferred while the

[Send the settings below.] check box of the
Setting Transfer Options is checked , the
connection with the sensor is terminated and
the system returns to the Activation Menu
screen.
After transferring files have been completed, the
6 transfer completion message appears.
yyIf you would like to transfer the I/O polarity

(NPN/PNP) and the network settings also,

check the [Send the settings below.] check
box of the Setting Transfer Options.
When the [Send the settings below.] check

box is checked, pay attention to the following
items.
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to
[Enable], the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
- Color type.....................70 images
- Monochrome type.........210 images
yyWhen a file transfer is completed, the
connection with the sensor is terminated
and the system returns to the Activation
Menu screen.
yyWhen the PROFINET communication is
being used, the sensor restarts.
yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed,
the connection is terminated and the sensor
restarts.

Folder composition and file naming rules
Reference
Data type Storage Rule Description
page
The arbitrary folder can be specified.
The default value of the storage folder
is as follows.
For Windows 7 Saves all the settings
Storage C:\Users\(Login user name)\ in the sensor in a
folder Documents\IV-Navigator batch.
Batch Backup For Windows XP All the images of the 6-21
C:\Documents and Settings\ image history can
(Login user name)\My Documents\ also be saved with
IV-Navigator settings.
File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1, *2 6

Extension iva
An arbitrary folder can be specified.
Saves the bmp format
is as follows.
file of the taken image
For Windows 7 and the ivp format file
Storage C:\Users\(Login user name)\ which can be used
folder Documents\IV-Navigator\Image for a master image
For Windows XP registration or Tool
Save Image C:\Documents and Settings\(Login user Auto Tuning at the 6-22
name)\My Documents\IV-Navigator\
same time.
Image
The IV-Navigator’s
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1, *3 screen will also be
File name
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss_screen*1, *4 saved at the same
bmp time (screenshot).
Extension
ivp
An arbitrary folder can be specified.
is as follows.
For Windows 7
Storage C:\Users\(Login user name)\
IV Series folder Documents\IV-Navigator Saves all the images
Auto Tuning
For Windows XP registered in the Tool 5-27
registration
C:\Documents and Settings\ Auto Tuning.
data file (Login user name)\My Documents\
IV-Navigator
PROG**
File name
(** indicates the program number)
Extension ivm
*1 YYYY : Year, MM : Month, DD : Day, hh : Hour, mm : Minute, ss : Second
*2 Changes to the arbitrary file name and saves it.
*3 Taken image file. Saved in bmp format and ivp format.
*4 Screenshot file of the IV-Navigator. Saved in bmp format.

Setting the Input and Output Information of the Sensor
This section explains the I/O Settings screen zz

Input Assignment
displayed when the [I/O Settings] button on the IN1
main screen is clicked. Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for
IN1 input line.
Only when the [I/O Settings] button is clicked in yyExt. Trigger Rising
the main screen in [Program], settings for inputting Sets the trigger input to the rising edge of the
and outputting of the sensor can be changed. external trigger.
yyExt. Trigger Falling
Input Settings Sets the trigger input to the falling edge of the
external trigger.
Sets the input settings for the sensor.
IN2 to IN6
1 Click the [I/O Settings] button in the main Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6.
screen in [Program]. yyOFF
6 Ignores the input.
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Specifies the number for switching the programs.

“Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)”
(Page 6-6)
yyClear Error
Sets the error output clearance.
yyExt. Master Save
The I/O Settings screen opens.
Sets the master image registration from the
2 Select the [Input] tab and set the input external input.
settings of the sensor. zz
Option
Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save
If the check box is checked , the system
writes the data to the ROM of the sensor when
the master registration is performed with the
external input or the field network.
“Registering the Master Image” (Page 8-8)
Enable program switching through external

input
If the check box is checked , the program
number can be switched with the external input.
“Preparing the program functions” (Page 6-7)
To switch the program number with the

external input, any of the program bit0 to bit4
must be assigned to any of the IN2 to IN6 of
the [Input Assignment].

[OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen in [Program].

Output Settings zz
Output Type
Select an output mode.
Sets the output settings for the sensor.
“Changing the timing of the status output”
1 Click the [I/O Settings] button in the main (Page 8-6)

screen in [Program]. [Latching]
Outputs the result along with the judgment
condition of the sensor.
The I/O Settings screen opens. [One-Shot] 6

Sets the One-Shot ON Time and ON-Delay Time
2 Select the [Output] tab and set the output

in which output the status output with one-shot.
settings of the sensor.
yyOne-Shot ON Time
Specifies the flash width of the one-shot within
1 to 1000 ms.
yyON-Delay Time
Specify the ON-Delay Time of the one-shot
flash within 0 to 5000 ms.

[OK] button.
zz
Output Type The system returns to the main screen in [Program].
OUT1 to OUT4
Specifies the output format of the output line
with [N.O] or [N.C].

I/O Monitor I/O Polarity

Whether or not the I/O line for control is correctly Switches the polarity of the sensor.
wired can be confirmed.
1 Click the [I/O Settings] button in the main
1 Click the [I/O Settings] button in the main screen in [Program].
screen in [Program].
6 The I/O Settings screen opens.

The I/O Settings screen opens.
2 Click the [I/O Polarity] button.
2 Select the [I/O Monitor] tab and set the

output settings of the sensor.
The Polarity screen opens.
3 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity.
zz
Input Monitor
Displays the input status of external input in real
time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output from the
PLC is being correctly input can be confirmed. yyNPN
zz
Output Test Output circuit.....NPN open collector
Click the [ON] button to turn ON each OUT Input circuit........No-voltage input
output. Click the [OFF] button to turn them OFF. yyPNP
Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is Output circuit.....PNP open collector
correctly output. Input circuit........Voltage input
“Cables”
��
(Page 2-8)
[OK] button.


If the polarity is switched, the confirmation
dialog appears.

The system returns to the I/O Settings screen.

The system returns to the main screen in
[Program].

Setting the Advanced Information of the Sensor
Advanced settings for the sensor [Environmental] tab

This section explains the Advanced Sensor Settings
zz
Device Settings
screen displayed when the [Advanced] button on
Sets the sensor name and changes the network
the main screen is clicked.
settings.
“Environmental” (Page 6-31)
zz
Field Network
Sets the field network settings.
“Field Network” (Page 6-33)
zz
Security
Sets the password lock setting.
“Security” (Page 6-34)
6 zz
Auto Focus Adjustment Position
Sets whether or not to make the adjusting
position for auto focus common to all programs.

“Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus
type only)” (Page 6-35)
[FTP] tab
Automatically transfers the image data and status
result information saved in the sensor memory to
an FTP server.
“FTP” (Page 6-36)
[Setup Adjustment] tab

Only when the [Advanced] button is clicked in the zz
Tilt Correction
main screen in [Program], the advanced settings Performs a tilt correction of the images
of the sensor can be changed. displayed on the screen.
“Tilt Correction” (Page 6-40)
zz
White Balance (for color type only)
Adjusts the white balance of the image displayed
on the screen.
6-42)
zz
Image Display Direction
Rotates the image displayed on the screen 180°.
“Image display direction” (Page 6-43)

[Backup] tab Environmental

Sets a sensor name and changes the network
zz
Batch Backup
settings.
Saves the settings data or image history saved
in the sensor to the PC.
“Batch Backup” (Page 6-44)
Setting a device name
zz
Transfer Program Settings
1 Display the Advanced Sensor Settings
Transfers the settings data saved in the PC to screen.
the sensor. “Advanced settings for the sensor” (Page 6-30)
“Transfer Program Settings” (Page 6-44)
2 Select the [Environmental] tab.
[Initialize/Update] tab
3 Set the environment settings of the 6
zz
Initialize Sensor sensor.
Initializes the sensor settings.

“Initialize Sensor” (Page 6-44)
zz
Update Sensor
Updates the operation software of the sensor.
“Update Sensor” (Page 6-44) zz
Device Name
Displays the sensor name.
[Sensor Information] tab To change the sensor name, click the [Change
Device Name] button and input an arbitrary
Displays the information set in the sensor.
name in the Device Name screen.
The model, version, serial number, MAC address,
The sensor can be arbitrary named and
IP address, and device name can be confirmed.
controlled. Input an arbitrary name.
yyIf the display language (Page 6-49) is

changed, the program name might be
replaced and displayed as hyphens (-).
yyTo use the PROFINET function, use only “a - z”,
“0-9”, “-”, and “.”. For the setting details, refer to
“IV Series User’s Manual (Field Network)”.
yyWhen you changed the device name while
the PROFINET communication is being used,
the sensor restarts.
zz
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The
MAC address cannot be changed.

[OK] button.
[Program].

Changing the network settings zz

[Reset] button
Clicking the [Reset] button resets the IP
Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway/Port
yyThe settings are not required for the direct Number.
connection.
“Empty” will be displayed after the reset.
yyHow to use the network setting
yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to the
network can be changed.
yyThe network settings of the sensor can be
initialized.
The settings can also be initialized using the
IP reset switch (Page A-35) of the sensor.
By clicking the [OK] button, the confirmation
yyTo set the IP address before connecting to the
dialog appears.
network, it can be set by connecting the PC
6 and sensor directly.
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
PROFINET communication is being used, the

sensor restarts.
By clicking the [Yes] button, the network settings

1 Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings will be reset and the system returns to the
screen.
Activation Menu screen.
“Advanced settings for the sensor” (Page 6-30)
2 Select the [Environmental] tab and click 4 After the setting is completed, click the
[OK] button.
[Change Network Settings] button.
Network Settings screen opens.
3 Sets the network address of the sensor.
zz
IP address/Subnet mask/Default gateway/
Port number
Displays the address for each network and port
number.
Set the desired address and port number, and
click the [OK] button.

Field Network
Communicates with a PLC via a field network and the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as
communication data.
For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be selected.
Host device such as PLC

(EtherNet/IP, PROFINET master unit)

Sensor EtherNet/IP, PROFINET adapter
yyTo use the field network function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor.
During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts.
yyFor the details of the field network function, refer to “IV Series User’s Manual (Field Network)”.
1 Display the Advanced Sensor Settings 3 Set field network settings.

screen.
2 Select the [Environmental] tab and click

the [Settings] button.
zz
Protocol
Select a protocol for the field network.
The Field Network setting screen opens. zz
Handshake Control
To enable the handshake control, check this
check box .
When the protocol is set as [Disable], this

setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.

[OK] button.
[Program].

Security
Setting the password lock
Sets the password to the sensor to prevent the

incorrect operation.
screen.
zz
Enable the password lock “Advanced settings for the sensor” (Page 6-30)
Open the main screen in [Run]. The “Lock Enabled”
message appears in the lower right of the screen. 2 Select the [Environmental] tab.
3 Place a check mark to the [Password
Lock] check box.
In the main screen in [Run], the following
operation can be locked.
yyTransition to the main screen in [Program]
yyProgram switching
6 yy[Manual Trigger]
yyReset statistics
yyLogging stop at the time of image history display

yyClearing the image history
yyTransfer Program Settings
If the lock is canceled, the operation will be
locked again by performing “Click the status bar”
4 Input an arbitrary password into the
[Password] and [Enter password for
or “Passage of 60 sec without performing any of confirmation].
the above locked operations”.
zz
Disable the password lock
Input the password when the input dialog for the
password to disable appears.
The “Lock Disabled” message appears in the

yyDefault: None (blank)
lower right of the screen.
yyBy clicking the [Undo] button, the setting
returns to the state before setting the new
password.
If you cancel the password lock and go to the
main screen in [Program], the password lock
will be canceled until you go to the main screen
[OK] button.
in [Run].
To disable the password lock, remove the check

mark from the [Password Lock] check box by
step 3.


(auto focus type only) When the auto focus adjustment position is set
to [Common], a message recommending
Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position re-registration of the master image appears.
for the auto focus common to all programs. Re-register the master image after the setting
is completed.
1 Display the Advanced Sensor Settings “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
screen. to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)
2 Select the [Environmental] tab. [OK] button.
3 Set the auto focus adjustment position.
6

zz
Individual
Sets the focus adjustment position in each
program. Select this when the focus position
is different for each target registered in each
program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when
the program number is switched. Switching
programs takes longer in this option due to the
time needed to adjust the focusing position.
zz
Common
Sets the focus adjustment position common to
all programs. Select this when the focus position
of the target registered in each program is
common. The program can be quickly switched
because re-adjustment of the focusing position
will not be performed when the program number
is switched.
The duration for the operation count of the

focusing function (program switch count) is
100,000 times. If the focusing position does
not need to be changed in each program,
set [Auto Focus Adjustment Position] to
[Common] to extend its duration.

FTP 4 Set the network address of the FTP server.

Automatically transfers the image data and status
result information saved in the sensor memory to
an FTP server.
Data transfer via FTP LAN
zz
IP Address
Displays the IP address of the FTP server.
Set an arbitrary address.
FTP client FTP server
6 zz
Port Number
Displays the port number.
yyTo use the FTP client function, select [Network
Set an arbitrary port number.

Connection] for the connection setting of the
sensor. During the direct connection, the setting zz
User Name
item is shaded and cannot be selected. Input the user name for logging in to the FTP
yyIf data are not transferred properly with the FTP server.
client function, refer to “Remedy when data Set an arbitrary user name.
transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-33).
1 Display the Advanced Sensor Settings Default: None (blank)

screen. zz
Password
“Advanced settings for the sensor” (Page 6-30) Input the password for logging in to the FTP
server.
2 Select the [FTP] tab and enable the FTP Set an arbitrary password.
client setting.
Default: None (blank)
zz
Passive Mode
To use the passive mode, select [Enable].
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to
[Enable], the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
yyColor type................. 70 images
yyMonochrome type..... 210 images
3 Click the [FTP Destination] button.
The FTP Destination Settings screen opens.

5 Click the [Connection Test] button to zz

Transfer Condition
test the connection with the connection Selects the transfer condition of image data.
destination. yyAll......................Transfers all the images that
The connection test is performed and the result are judged.
yyNG Only............Transfers all the images whose
window opens.
total status results are NG.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],

adjust the processing time so that all the
images can be transferred.
yyWhen the transfer could not be done on time,
If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the the data are saved in the internal buffer. The
internal buffer can save images up to 30
setting is completed.
images.
When the test is executed, the connection with

yyImage data are transferred in the sequence that
they have been saved to the internal buffer.
6
the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal

destination, and data file creating are tested. buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and
the image data transfer fails.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
When the connection cannot be done properly, confirm that there is sufficient storage area
deal with the problem in accordance with the on the FTP server.
cause of connect failure displayed on the
result window.
zz
File Format
“Remedy when data transfer via FTP is Selects the file saving format for image data.
unavailable” (Page A-33) yyIVP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation
6 Click the [OK] button. results can be confirmed in the simulator
The system returns to the Advanced Sensor function by using the transferred image data.
Settings screen. Moreover, the image data can be converted to
the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter.
7 Set the file transfer conditions. yyBMP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by other applications.
zz
Transfer Judgment Results
To transfer judgement results simultaneously with
the image data, select [Enable].
Judgement results are transferred as a tab
delimited text.
The example for displaying the saved results

file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

zz
FTP Error zz
Folder
To turn ON the error output function for when a Specifies the transfer destination folder of FTP
file transfer failed, select [Enable]. server.
Set an arbitrary folder name.
When this item is set to [Enable], the yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to
followings occur if a file transfer fails. be transferred to the root folder.
yyThe following error messages are displayed yyTo specify a subfolder, break it with "/" (one-
in response to the causes of failure. byte slash).
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new
- FTP Connection Error
folder will be created.
- FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)
- FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)
“Remedy when data transfer via FTP is Default: None (blank). Up to 16 characters can
unavailable” (Page A-33) be set.
6 yyThe error output function turns ON.

yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red.
yy“/” (one-byte slash), “.” (one-byte point) and
yyIf “FTP Transfer Error” has occurred while
“ ” (one-byte space) cannot be used as the

the sensor is running, the error condition will
first nor last letter of the folder name.
continue until the error is cleared. yy“/” (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple
times in a row.
8 Specify the transfer destination folder of
FTP server.

zz
File Name zz
Create Subfolder
Sets the file name of the transfer files. To create subfolders under the transfer
destination folder, select [Enable].
yyDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters
can be set. yyThe subfolder naming rule is as follows.
yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows.
IVxxxxx
xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD
(xxxxx is a sequence number created
yyxxxxxx.......The file name which has been
every time the sensor is restarted or the
set (up to 16 characters)
FTP settings are changed.)
yyAAAAA......A sequence number for each
FTP transfer (5 digits which yyWhen subfolders were created, the folder
zero suppression is used). structure is as follows.
Promptly after startup, “00000” Root folder
is displayed.
yyBB.............The program number (2 digits
which zero suppression is
Transfer destination folder
6
used) Subfolder

yyCC.............The total status result (“OK”
0000
or “NG”)
yyDDD..........The extension (“ivp” or “bmp”) 0001
0002
yyIf there is a file with the same name at
When the file index quantity reaches the
the transfer destination, that file will be
index upper limit, the folder of the next
overwritten. When you transfer image data
sequence number is created.
from multiple IV series, specify different
transfer destinations so that the image data
are not overwritten accidentally.
yyThe default of subfolders is “IV00001”.
yyIf the transfer destination folder is read only
or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the yyThe upper limit is “IV99999”. When the upper
image data transfer will fail. limit has been reached, the count continues
by returning to “IV00000”.
zz
Index Upper Limit yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyThe upper limit of the count number of folders
Sets the upper limit of the number of image
in the subfolder is “9999”. When the number
data which can be transferred to the transfer is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.
destination folder.

When the file index quantity has reached the [OK] button.
index upper limit, as follows. The system returns tothe main screen in
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON], [Program].
the folder of the next sequence number is
created.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF],
the file index quantity returns to “0”.

Tilt Correction
If the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor
and target and/or to prevent a shine on the target’s surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally
distorted.
The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion.
Vertical correction Horizontal correction
Indicator light
6 Top view
Top view
Target
Target
Indicator light
Target Target
Lateral view Lateral view
Before tilt After tilt correction Before tilt After tilt correction
correction (vertical) correction (horizontal)

1 Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings zz

Vertical
screen. Performs a tilt correction in the vertical direction.
“Advanced settings for the sensor” (Page 6-30) Slide the slider to correct the display of the
vertical direction of the taken image.
2 Select the [Setup Adjustment] tab.
3 Place a check mark to the [Enable Tilt
Correction] check box and click the [Set]
button. Before correction After correction Before correction
<Image of vertical correction>
zz
Horizontal
Performs a tilt correction in the horizontal direction.
Slide the slider to correct display of the
The Tilt Correction screen opens. horizontal direction of the taken image. 6
4 Image a target to be a reference such as a

piece of paper printed with square grids.
Before correction After correction Before correction

<Image of horizontal correction>
yyIf the quality of the displayed taken image is

poor, click the [Image Settings] tab to adjust
the taken image.
The following adjustments can be made.
“Brightness
��
“Focus
��
5 Perform the tilt correction. “Lighting”

��
(Page 4-19)
yyMake sure the target fits within the imaging
area after tilt correction. The imaging area
after the tilt correction may have become
narrower than before the correction by the tilt
correction.

[OK] button.
Settings screen.

Re-register the master image if the tilt correction

is performed.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)

White Balance (for color type only) 4 Image a white-colored target and click the
[Go] button.
Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in
camera of the sensor.
The white balance is adjusted by default.

screen.
2 Select the [Setup Adjustment] tab.

After the white balance adjustment is completed,
6 3 Place a check mark to the [Enable White the message “White balance adjustment has
Balance Adjustment] check box and click been completed.” appears.
the [Set] button.

The system returns to the White balance window.

After performing a white balance adjustment,
The White Balance screen opens. a message prompting you to re-register the
master image appears.
If the displayed taken image is not suitable for Re-register the master image after the setting
adjusting the white balance, click the [Image is completed.
Settings] tab to adjust the taken image. Also, “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
if the white balance has been set to [Enable], to be a Reference for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)
the image will be displayed with the white The system returns to the Advanced Sensor
balance adjustment applied. Settings screen.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy “Brightness
��
yy “Focus
��
yy “Lighting”
��
(Page 4-19)

Image display direction 1 Display the Advanced Sensor Settings

screen.
The target to be displayed on the screen may be
rotated 180° and displayed due to the installation
restrictions of the sensor and target. Change the 2 Select the [Setup Adjustment] tab.
display direction of an image and the image rotated
180° can be displayed. 3 Select [Rotate 180°].
Indicator light

yyAfter performing a rotate 180° correction, a
message prompting you to re-register the master
image appears.
Re-register the master image after the
setting is completed.
Target
“2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image to be a Reference for Judgment)”
(Page 4-20)
yyIf a tilt correction (Page 6-40) has also been
performed, confirm the tilt correction settings
after a rotate 180° correction.
Settings screen.
Before rotating 180° After rotating 180°


Batch Backup
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in
a batch.
When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings
can be copied based on the batch backup data.
For details of procedures, refer to “Backing up in
a batch” (Page 6-21).

Transfers the settings data (batch backup file)
saved in the PC to the sensor.
6 For details of procedures, refer to “Transferring
the backed up settings to the sensor” (Page 6-23).
Initialize Sensor
Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets
to the factory default.
For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the
sensor” (Page 3-10).
The following settings will not be initialized.

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28)
yyNetwork Settings (Page 6-32)
Update Sensor
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
Sensor Information
Displays the information set in the sensor.
The model, version, serial number, MAC address,
IP address, and device name can be confirmed.

Operating from the menu bar
[File] menu 4 Click the [OK] button.

Batch Backup
Backs up the data saved in the sensor to the PC in
a batch.
For details of procedures, refer to “Backing up in
The system returns to the main screen in [Run].
a batch” (Page 6-21).
The example for displaying the saved Program

settings list file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.
Transfers the settings data (batch backup file)
saved in the PC to the sensor.
For details of procedures, refer to “Transferring 6
the backed up settings to the sensor” (Page 6-23).

Export

Statistics/Histogram Data
Outputs the statistical information and histogram

Program Settings List information in the tab-delimited text.
Outputs the information set in the sensor in the Tab
delimited text. 1 Select [File] → [Export] → [Statistics/
Histogram Data] from the menu bar.
1 Display the main screen in [Program]. The Statistics/Histogram Data screen opens.
(Page 5-3)
2 Select [File] → [Export] → [Program
Settings List] from the menu bar.
The Program Settings List screen opens.
Change the saving destination of the file and

file name as needed.
The save completion message appears.


3 Click the [OK] button. [View] menu
Statistics
Switches the statistical information to show/hide.
For details of procedures, refer to “Displaying
the statistical information” (Page 5-10)�.
The system returns to the main screen in [Run]
or [Program].
Tool Data
The example for displaying the saved
Statistics/histogram data file with Microsoft Switches the tool data to show/hide.
Excel is as follows. For details of procedures, refer to “Displaying
the tool information” (Page 5-12)�.
6
Exit
Exits the IV-Navigator.
1 Select [File] → [Exit] from the menu bar.

The IV-Navigator exits.

[Sensor] menu [Image] menu
Disconnect Zoom
Disconnects the connection between the sensor
and PC, and displays the connection menu screen.

Zoom Out
Reduces the image displayed on the IV-Navigator.
1 Select [Sensor] → [Disconnect] from the Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Enlarge(Zoom Out)]
from the menu bar. The image will be reduced
menu bar.
The system returns to the Activation Menu screen. per selecting.
Minimum of 100% can be reduced.

Zoom In 6
Magnifies the image displayed on the IV-Navigator.

Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Enlarge(Zoom In)]
from the menu bar. The image will be magnified
per selecting.
Up to 500% can be magnified.

Reset Statistics
Resets the statistical information and histograms.

Fit to Window
1 Display the main screen in [Run]. Fits the image displayed on the IV-Navigator to
the screen size and displays it.
2 Select [Sensor] → [Reset Statistics] from Select [Image] → [Zoom] → [Fit to Window] from
the menu bar. the menu bar.
Tool Display Options
The statistical information and histograms will Switches the display method of the tool.
be reset. Select [Image] → [Tool Display Options] from the
menu bar and select an arbitrary display method.
Selectable display methods are as follows.
Initialize Sensor
Initializes the information set in the sensor and set zz
For color type
to the factory default. Off/Window/Process 1/Process 2
For details of procedures, refer to “Initializing the zz
For monochrome type
sensor” (Page 3-10). Off/Window/Process/Process 1/Process 2
For details of each display method, refer to
Sensor Update “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)�.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.

Manual Trigger [Setting] menu

Issues a trigger one time in each time selecting
[Image] → [Manual Trigger] from the menu bar. This Manual trigger button
button is used when the external trigger cannot be When an external trigger is being set, select it to
input. show/hide the [Manual Trigger] button.
Enabled only when the external trigger is being set. Select [Setting] → [Manual Trigger Button] from the
menu bar and select the [Show]/[Hide].
Capture When an internal trigger is being set, the Manual

trigger button will not be displayed.

Save Image
Saves the bmp format file of the taken image
6 and the ivp format file which can be used for a

master image registration or Tool Auto Tuning at Image while Running
the same time.
Select it to show/hide the [Image while Running]. If

The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at it is set to hide, you can stop updating images and
the same time (screenshot). update the status result faster.
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Save Image] Select [Setting] → [Image while Running] from the
from the menu bar. menu bar and select the [Show]/[Hide].

Show saved image file location
Opens the saving destination folder of the
captured image.
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Show saved
image file location] from the menu bar.

Change saved image file location
Opens the reference screen of a folder and
changes a saving destination of the captured
image.
1 Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Change

saved image file location] from the menu
bar.
2 In the reference screen of a folder, select

an arbitrary folder and click the [OK]
button.

Language [Window] menu

Switches the display language of the IV-Navigator.
Selectable languages are as follows. Program Details
Japanese / English / German / Displays the Program Details screen.
Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Select [Window] → [Program Details] from the
Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean menu bar.
For details of the Program Details screen, refer
1 Select [Setting] → [Language] from to “Things can be performed with the program
the menu bar and select an arbitrary functions” (Page 6-6).
language.
Sensor’s Internal Image History
Displays the Sensor’s internal Image history screen. 6
Select [Window] → [Sensor’s Internal Image History]

from the menu bar.
For details of the Sensor's internal image history
screen, refer to “Sensor’s Internal Image History
2 Click the [OK] button. (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)”
(Page 6-15).
3 Exits the IV-Navigator.
“Exit” (Page 6-46)
I/O Settings
4 Start the IV-Navigator again.
The display language of the IV-Navigator will be Displays the I/O Settings screen.
switched to the language selected in step 1. Select [Window] → [I/O Settings] from the menu bar.
For details of the I/O Settings screen,
Regarding the display of the characters in device refer to “Setting the Input and Output Information
names (Page 6-31) and program names (Page 6-11) of the Sensor” (Page 6-26).
yyCharacters which cannot be display with
the language after change are replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-). Advanced Sensor Settings
yyIf the device or program name has not been
Displays the Advanced Sensor Settings screen.
changed after the language change, it will be
displayed as they were when the language is Select [Window] → [Advanced Sensor Settings]
changed back. from the menu bar.
yyIf the device or program name has been For details of the Advanced Sensor Settings screen,
changed after the language change, it will refer to “Setting the Advanced Information of the
remain replaced by hyphens (-) and the former Sensor” (Page 6-30).
information will be erased when the language is
changed back.

[Help] menu
User's Manual
Opens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the
selected language.
Select [Help] → [User's Manual] from the menu bar.
yyThe User's Manual (PDF format) can also be

opened by pressing the <F1> key.
yyWhen the [Help] menu does not exit on the menu
bar such as in the Program Details screen, Sensor
Setup screen (Settings Navigator), etc, open the
6 User's Manual by pressing the <F1> key.
Version information
Displays the version information of the IV-Navigator.
Select [Help] → [About] from the menu bar.

Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter
Converting IVP Data to BMP Data

Using the IVP-Converter
IVP-Converter is a software for transferring image data in IVP format, which have been saved individually
in the image history or saved by the FTP client function, to BMP format.
The files operating method is generally the same as the explorer operating method in the Windows standard.
Installing the IVP-Converter Starting up the IVP-Converter

When you install the IV-Navigator on the PC, the
OVP-Converter is installed simultaneously. 1 Double-click the [IVP-Converter] icon on
Therefore, there is no need to install the IVP- the desktop.
Converter separately.
yyFor the details of the IV-Navigator installing The IVP-Converter starts.

procedure, refer to “Installing the IV-
Navigator (IV-H1)” (Page 2-14).
yyWhen you install the IV-Navigator, The shortcut 6
icon of the IVP-Converter is also created on the

PC desktop.
Main screen of the IVP Converter

This section explains the main screen of the IVP-Converter.
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
(1) Conversion source folder (4) [About] button

Specifies the folder where the IVP data you Displays the About IVP-Converter screen.
would like to convert are to be stored. (5) [Language] button
(2) [...] button Displays the language selecting screen. You
Opens the folder to specify the conversion can select an arbitrary language to switch the
source folder. display language.
(3) [Convert] button (6) [Close] button
Converts all of the IVP data that are stored in Exits the IVP-Convertor.
the folder specified at the Conversion source
folder and its subfolders to BMP data.

Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Using the IVP-Converter
Converting IVP data to BMP data

yyThe BMP data are saved in the same folder
Saves IVP data as BMP data, which can be opened
as the pre-converted IVP.
in other applications. yyDuring the conversion, the following screen
is displayed and the total amount of IVP data
1 Click the [...] button and specify the folder and conversion progress can be confirmed.
where the IVP data you would like to
convert are to be stored.
6 yyIf there are BMP data with the same names,

they will be over written.
yyUp to 100,000 files of IVP data can be
converted at a time.
All of the IVP data that are stored in the

specified folder and its subfolders are the
conversion targets.
2 Click the [Convert] button to execute the

BMP conversion.
BMP data are saved in the conversion source

folder.

7
This chapter explains the functions and operations
of the Simulator.
Simulator
Simulator.............................................................7-2
Basic Operation of Simulator............................7-3
Names and Functions of the Screen................7-6
Settings Navigator
(Sensor Setup Simulation).................................7-8
IV Sensor Simulation.......................................7-14
Operating from the menu bar..........................7-18
7
Simulator
- IV Series User’s Manual (PC Software) - 7-1

Simulator
Simulator
Simulator is the function for checking/changing the program settings with IV-Navigator without a connected
sensor, based on the batch backup file (*.iva), and for performing an “IV Sensor Simulation” based on the
history images.
It is also possible to transfer the data to the sensor and to perform operation again after changing the
setting data with the Simulator.
(1) Operate by using the sensor
(Save the image history)
Saves the batch backup file

(2) Transfers the batch backup
(5)
(*.iva) from the sensor file (*.iva) to the sensor
7
(3) Setting changes (4) Confirm the operation
Simulator
status
Simulator
Three main operations which can be performed with the Simulator function are as follows.

Sensor Setup Simulation
With no sensor connected, it is possible to edit and save the tool settings etc. based on the program
settings saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).
The screen to be displayed is the same as in the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup). However, some
functions which cannot be used by Simulator are being hidden.

IV Sensor Simulation
With no sensor connected, it is possible to check the actual operation result based on the image history
and the program saved in the batch backup file (*.iva).
It is also possible to adjust the tool settings by changing the tool thresholds during simulation.

Confirming the image history
The images in the image history saved as the batch backup file (*.iva) can be confirmed.
7-2 - IV Series User’s Manual (PC Software) -

Basic Operation of Simulator
Basic Operation of Simulator
Operation flow of the Simulator Saving the batch backup file
Saving the batch backup file (*.iva)

1 If you wish to perform the “IV Sensor
Simulation”, save the sensor’s internal
Save the settings and the sensor image history
image history into the memory of the
from the operating sensor.
“Saving the batch backup file” (Page 7-3) sensor.
“Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming
the Images whose Status Result is NG)” (Page
6-15)
Starting the Simulator 2 Save the batch backup file (*.iva) to be

Open the batch backup file (*.iva) and read to the Simulator from the sensor.
start the Simulator. The saved settings are used for the Sensor
“Starting the Simulator” (Page 7-4) Setup Simulation.
For use of the “IV Sensor Simulation”, also save
the image history.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 6-21)
7
Simulator
Sensor Setup Simulation
Check/Change the settings.
“Settings Navigator (Sensor The batch backup file (*.iva) can be saved by
Setup Simulation)” (Page 7-8) using the monitor (IV-M30). For details, refer to
the “IV Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.
Check the operation status based
on the images of the image history.
“IV Sensor Simulation” (Page 7-14)
Exiting the Simulator

Save the batch backup file (*.iva).
“Exiting the Simulator” (Page 7-5)
Transferring to the sensor

Transfer the batch backup file (*.iva) to
the sensor.
“Transferring to the sensor” (Page 7-5)

Simulator
Starting the Simulator
1 Double-click the [IV-Navigator] icon on the 3 Select a file and click the [Open] button.
desktop.
The Activation Menu screen opens.
2 Click the [Open file] button.
Files with the formats other than iva format

cannot be used.
7 The main screen for the Simulator opens.
yyIf the [Language] is clicked, the Select

Simulator

language so that the language to be
displayed can be switched.
yyThe Simulator can be opened by double-
clicking an IVA file.
Simulator screen and operation flow

This section explains the screen to be displayed in the Simulator and the operation flow.
For details of what can be set on each screen and its operations, see to the applicable references.
Main screen of the Simulator
(Page 7-6)
Settings Navigator
(Sensor Setup Simulation)
Check/Edit the program settings.
(Page 7-8)
Perform the “IV Sensor Simulation”
based on the image history. (Page 7-14)

Simulator
Exiting the Simulator Transferring to the sensor
1 Return to the main screen for the Simulator. 1 Transfer the saved batch backup file to
If the [Sensor Setup Simulation] or [IV Sensor the sensor.
Simulation] is activating, exit it. “Transferring the backed up settings to the
sensor” (Page 6-23)
2 Select [File] → [Terminate IV-Simulator]
from the menu bar.
When the program setting or image history has
You can also use Monitor (IV-30) to transfer the
been changed, the confirmation dialog to save batch backup file (*.iva) to the sensor. For details,
appears. refer to the “IV Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.

The Save As screen opens.

7
Simulator
The change contents are saved in the batch
backup file (*.iva) and the system returns to the
Activation Menu screen.
yyIf you want to reduce the file size, delete the

entire image history with the [Image Hist.] on
the main screen of the Simulator or the [Delete]
button of [IV Sensor Simulation] before saving
the file. Only the settings are saved and the file
size becomes small.
yyWhen saving with the Simulator,
“Statistics/Histogram screen in operation” and
“Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation”
are not be saved.

Names and Functions of the Screen
Main screen of the Simulator

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(8)
(9)
(10) (15)
(11) (16)
(12)
(13)
(17)
(14)
7 (1) File name

Displays the file name of the batch backup file
(7) [Advanced] button
(*.iva) being opened by the Simulator. “Advanced Sensor Settings” (Page 7-21)
Simulator
(2) [Save] button (8) Menu bar

Saves the settings being set in the Simulator “Operating from the menu bar” (Page 7-18)
into the batch backup file (*.iva). (9) Status bar
“Save” (Page 7-18) Displays the image type (Master) and trigger type.
(3) Program information (10) Image tool bar
Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and Displays the tools for operating the image being
program name (Page 6-12). displayed in the Simulator.
Programs can be switched from the pull-down “Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)
menu.
(11) Tool window
(4) [Detail] button Displays the selected tool region with an orange
Displays the Program Details screen. frame. You can also switch the selected tool by
“Displaying the Program Details screen” clicking the designated region.
(Page 6-11) “Selecting a display method for tools” (Page 5-7)
(5) [Image Hist.] button (12) Search Region
Displays the sensor’s internal image history saved If the search region of the selected tool is being
in the batch backup file (*.iva) being opened. set to Partial, the search region will be displayed
“Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming with a light blue frame.
the Images whose Status Result is NG)”
(Page 6-15) (13) Brightness correction region
When the brightness correction is being set, the
(6) [I/O Settings] button brightness correction region will be displayed
Displays the I/O Settings screen. with a blue frame.
“I/O Settings” (Page 7-21)

(14) Sensor Information

Displays the Model and Device Name (Page
6-31) for the sensor.
(15) [Sensor Setup Simulation] button
Displays the Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup
Simulation) screen.
“Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup
Simulation)” (Page 7-8)
(16) [IV Sensor Simulation] button
Displays the IV Sensor Simulation screen.
“IV Sensor Simulation” (Page 7-14)
(17) Master image display
Displays the master image registered to the
currently selected program.
Simulator

Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation)
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the contents which can set on each setting screen and its operations, refer to the applicable
references.
Image Optimization
“1. Image Optimization”
(Page 7-9)
A
7 Master Registration
“2. Master Registration”
(Page 7-10)
Simulator
Tool Settings
“3. Tool Settings”
(Page 7-12)
Output Assignment
“4. Output Assignment”
(Page 7-13)

Confirm the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target.
In the Settings Navigator of the Simulator, the settings of the Image Optimization can only be confirmed.
Image Optimization cannot be changed.
Main screen for the Image Optimization

Explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
7
(5)
Simulator
(6) (7)
(1) Title (5) Setting confirmation screen

Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and Displays the settings of the item selected by the
program name (Page 6-12). settings button in the tab format.
(2) Shortcut button (6) [Next to STEP2] button
Displays the shortcut button to each step. Proceeds to "2. Master Registration".
(3) Image display screen “2. Master Registration” (Page 7-10)
Only displays a message. The image will not be (7) [Exit Setup] button
displayed. Finishes the Settings Navigator.
(4) Settings button “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow”
Displays the settings which can be confirmed in (Page 7-8)
the Image Optimization.
“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
“Extended Functions for the Image
Optimization” (Page 4-16)

2. Master Registration
Register a master image to be a reference for judgment. Also, set the Brightness Correction.
In the Settings Navigator of the Simulator, the following images can be registered as master image.
yyImages of the image history saved in the currently opened batch backup file (*.iva)
yyMaster image or images of the image history saved in a batch backup file (*.iva) other than the one
currently opened
yyImage capture file (*.ivp)
Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the Master Registration.
(1)
(2)
(3) (6)
7 (4)
Simulator
(5)
(7) (8) (9)
(1) Title (6) Edit settings screen

Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and Displays the settings for the Master Registration
program name (Page 6-12). in the tab format.
(2) Shortcut button “Master registration from the image history
Displays the shortcut button to each step. in the sensor” (Page 7-11)
“Master registration using the file saved in
(3) [Image type] display the PC” (Page 7-11)
Displays the image type. “Extended Functions for the Master
yyMaster...............Displays the master image. Registration” (Page 4-25)
(4) Image tool bar (7) [Back] button
Displays the tools for operating the master Returns to the settings screen for the Image
image. Optimization.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11) “1. Image Optimization” (Page 7-9)
(5) Image by the sensor (8) [Next to STEP3] button
Displays the master image. Proceeds to “3. Tool settings”.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 7-12)
(9) [Exit Setup] button
(Page 7-8)

Registering the master image

Master registration from the image
history in the sensor
Register the image of the image history saved in
the batch backup file (*.iva) as a master image.
To perform a master image registration from

the image history in sensor, the image to be
registered as a master image in the image
history must be saved in advance.
“Sensor’s Internal Image History
(Confirming the Images whose Status Result
is NG)” (Page 6-15)
For details of procedures, refer to “Master

registration from the image history in the sensor” 7
(Page 4-22).
Simulator

Master registration using the file
saved in the PC
Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image
capture file (*.ivp) stored in the PC, and register
as a master image.
yySave the image to be registered as a master

image into any PC in advance.
yyThe files which can be registered as a
master image are batch backup files (*.iva)
and the image capture files (*.ivp).
“Folder composition and file naming rules”
(Page 6-25)
yyRegister images taken with a sensor with the
same installation conditions and the same
image-related settings (exposure conditions
etc.). Otherwise correct judgment may not be
possible.
For details of procedures,

refer to “Master registration using the file
saved in the PC” (Page 4-23).

3. Tool Settings
Tools for judgment of the quality of the target can be added, edited, copied, and deleted.
For details, refer to “3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)” (Page 4-28).
In the Settings Navigator for the Simulator, following buttons will not be displayed.
yy[Live Adjustment] button for adjustment of the threshold of each tool
yy[to Live Image] button for color extraction (Color Area tool) and for brightness extraction (Area tool)
Main screen for the Tool settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1)
(2) (6)
(3)
7
(4)
(7)
Simulator
(5)
(8) (9) (10)

Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and Adds, edits, copies, and deletes the tool.
program name (Page 6-12). “Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool”
(2) Shortcut button (Page 4-31)
Displays the shortcut button to each step. (7) Tool list
(3) [Image type] display Displays a list of tools set in the program and a
Displays the image type. threshold of each tool.
yyMaster...............Displays the master image. (8) [Back] button
(4) Image tool bar The system returns to the Master Registration
Displays the tools for operating the master screen.
image. “2. Master Registration” (Page 7-10)
(5) Master image Proceeds to output assignment.
Displays a master image and a tool window. If “4. Output Assignment” (Page 7-13)
a search region is set, the tool window which (10) [Exit Setup] button
indicates the search region (light blue) will be Finishes the Settings Navigator.
displayed. “Settings Navigator screen and operation
By clicking the tool window, the selected tool flow” (Page 7-8)
can be switched.

Set the output items to be assigned to the output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
“Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor” (Page 2-8)
“Chapter 8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1)
Main screen for the Output Assignment

This section explains the main screen for the Output Assignment.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (6)
(7)
(5)
7
Simulator
(8) (9)

Displays the program number (Page 6-11) and yy[Output Assignment] tab
program name (Page 6-12). Assigns the output item to each output line.
(2) Shortcut button “Setting the Output Assignment” (Page 4-61)
Displays the shortcut button to each step. yy[Extended Functions] tab
Sets the total status conditions and logics.
(3) [Image type] display “Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)
Displays the image type. “Setting Logics” (Page 4-64)
yyMaster...............Displays the master image.
(7) [Valid]/[Invalid] setting for the trigger error
(4) Image tool bar output
Displays the tools for operating the image taken Selects whether to enable/disable the output
by the sensor. when the trigger error occurred.
“Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11) “Error Messages” (Page A-19)
(5) Master image (8) [Back] button
Displays the master image. Returns to the Tool settings screen.
“3. Tool Settings” (Page 7-12)
(9) [Complete] button
“Settings Navigator screen and operation
flow” (Page 7-8)

Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation
For Outline/Position Adjustment tool

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(12)
(17)
(18)
7 (19)
(20)
Simulator
(1) [Batch retest] button yy (Repeat)......When this button is ON ( ),

Performs batch operation simulation for all images. the operation simulation is
(2) [Reset] button repeated from the first history
Resets the result of batch operation simulation image after the operation
for every image. The status result will be [--]. simulation for the last history
image ends. Repeat can be
(3) Operating button for operation simulation
switched ON/OFF during
yy ....Start operation simulation
reproduction.
(Reproduction) one by one in order from the
yy (Go to the ....Transition to the next OK
selected history image. The
next OK Image) image after the selected
reproduction speed (Fast/
history image.
Normal/Slow) can be selected
yy (Go to the ....Transition to the next NG
by clicking the [▼] button.
next NG Image) image after the selected
yy (Stop)..........Stop the operation simulation
history image.
being reproduced.
yy (Back)..........Shift the history image selection
When (Go to the next OK Image) / (Go
one position to the left.
to the next NG Image) is executed after
yy (Next)...........Shift the history image selection the settings for a threshold etc. have been
one position to the right. changed, the judgment result may be changed
depending on the simulation result.
(4) [Add Image] button

Add an image to be used for the operation
simulation from a batch backup file (*.iva) or an
image capture file (*.ivp).

(5) [Delete] button (9) Thumbnail image (image history)

Deletes the selected image. The image becoming the target of theoperation
The type of the image to be deleted can be simulation.
selected by clicking the [▼] button. Displays the number of triggers, the status result of
yyDelete All.............Deletes all images. the operation simulation, and the thumbnail image.
yyDelete OK only....Deletes all of OK images.
yyDelete NG only....Deletes all of NG images. yyFor details of number of triggers, refer to
yyDelete all images....Deletes all images on the “Displaying the statistical information” (Page 5-10).
on the left from left from the one selected. yyUnnecessary images can be deleted ((5) [Delete]
the one selected button) and necessary images can be added
yyDelete all images....Deletes all images on the from a different file ((4) [Add Image] button).
on the right from right from the one selected. yyThe display order can be changed by drag
the one selected and drop of the selected image. The [Undo
Delete] button becomes disabled when the
display order has been changed.
When an image has been deleted from the yyIn the initial status, the newest image is at
menu displayed by clicking the [▼] button, the the left edge. The history becomes older
[Undo Delete] button becomes disabled. The
from the left to the right. 7
deletion of the image cannot be undone.
(10) Image being selected (Orange frame)
Simulator
(6) [Undo Delete] button Indicates the image being selected.
Restores an image which have been deleted by IV Sensor Simulation is performed automatically
clicking the [Delete] button. You can undo back for the selected image and the judgment result
up to 20 images. is displayed.
(7) Number of OKs/NGs (11) Status result

Displays the number of images for which the Displays the judgment result for IV Sensor
judgment result from the operation simulation is Simulation for the selected thumbnail image.
OK or NG. (12) Magnified display screen
(8) Image number Magnifies the selected thumbnail image.
Display the image No. of the history images “Operating the image tool bar” (Page 3-11)
read into the Simulator as “(Currently selected (13) Status gauge
image No.)/(Total number of images)”. Displays the tools set in the program. Tool name,
threshold, matching rate for each tool and status
result are displayed.
Status result OK is displayed in green and NG
is displayed in red.
yyJudge is OK
Tool Name Threshold

Matching rate and
yyJudge is NG status result
For details of status results, refer to

“Displaying and outputting the status result”
(Page A-4).

(14) Tool Name

For Color Area/Area tool
Displays the tool name of the selected tool.
During operation simulation for the Color Area/Area
(15) Judgment record
tool, [Color Extraction (Color Area tool)], [Brightness
Displays the number of images for OK or NG.
Extraction (Area tool)], and [Upper Limit] are
yyOK.....Displays the number of images for “OK”.
displayed in addition to the functions displayed
yyNG.....Displays the number of images for “NG”.
on the main screen of the Outline tool/Position
(16) Matching rate information Adjustment tool.
yyMAX...... Displays the maximum value of the *
matching rate. The screen for
yyMIN....... Displays the minimum value of the the Color Area
tool
matching rate.
yyAVE....... Displays the average value of the
matching rate.
(17) Histogram
7 Displays the result of the operation simulation

for the selected tool as a histogram (frequency
distribution).
Simulator
With the threshold being a border, the range

for OK is displayed in green and for NG is
(1) (2)
displayed in red.
yyAbscissa axis....Displays the distribution range (1) Color Extraction (Color Area tool)/
of the matching rate. The Brightness Extraction (Area tool)
display range is fixed. It cannot The screen for setting the Color Area/Area
be specified arbitrary. extraction range appears when the [Setup]
yyVertical axis.......This will be adjusted button is clicked.
automatically according For details of setting procedures, refer to
to the maximum value of “Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-44).
the frequency. It cannot be
(2) Upper Limit
specified arbitrary.
When the checkbox for the upper limit threshold
(18) Matching rate of the latest judgment process is checked , the slider for setting the upper
Displays the matching rate of the latest judgment and the lower limit of the threshold appears.
process. For details of setting procedures, refer to
The status result changes according to the setting “Setting the upper limit” (Page 4-48).
of the threshold value.
(19) Threshold
Other than the above, the main screen of
Displays the threshold of the selected tool. The
“IV Sensor Simulation” for the Color Area / Area tool is
threshold value can be changed by dragging
the same as the main screen of “IV Sensor Simulation”
the slider. for the Outline tool/Position Adjustment tool.
(20) [Complete] button “For Outline/Position Adjustment tool” (Page 7-14)
Simulator.

Starting the IV Sensor Simulation 5 After the IV Sensor Simulation is

completed, click the [Complete] button at
the lower right on the screen.
1 Displays the main screen for the The system returns to the main screen for the
Simulator.
Simulator.
“Starting the Simulator” (Page 7-4)
2 Click the [IV Sensor Simulation] button. The test results will not be saved. If you want
to check the test results again, perform IV
Sensor Simulation (Batch retest) with the
same settings and the same image history.
The message dialog appears.
3 Click the [OK] button. 7

The IV Sensor Simulation screen opens.
Simulator
4 Perform the IV Sensor Simulation by
clicking the [Batch retest] button.
For operations of IV Sensor Simulation, refer to

“Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation”
(Page 7-14).
Please perform “Batch retest” when the setting

for “Color Extraction”/”Brightness Extraction” or
the setting of the threshold has been changed.
If this is not done, pay attention to the following
items.
yyThe frequency distribution of the histogram
is not displayed correctly (when the setting
has been changed, the matching rate may
change after retesting).
yyThe “Number of OKs/NGs” and the “Judgment
record” are not updated.

[File] menu Save

Save the contents set with the Simulator as a batch
Open file backup file (*.iva) to the PC.
Opens the batch backup file (*.iva) saved in the PC.
1 Select [File] → [Save] from the menu bar.
1 Select [File] → [Open file] from the menu The save as screen opens.
bar.
2 Select a file and click the [Open] button.
7
Simulator

Files with the formats other than iva format
cannot be used.
The main screen for the Simulator opens. Simulator.
Export

Save Program Settings List
Outputs the sensor information held in
the IV‑Simulator as the tab-delimited text.
For details, refer to “Program Settings List” (Page
6-45).

Save Statistics/Histogram Data in
operation
Outputs the same statistical information and
histogram information as when operating with
sensor as the tab-delimited text.
The histogram data at the time of “IV Operation
Simulation” is not output.
For details, refer to “Statistics/Histogram Data”
(Page 6-45).

Check Statistics/Histogram in operation Terminate IV-Simulator

Displays the statistical information and the Terminates the Simulator and returns to the
histogram information at the time of operation with Activation Menu screen.
a sensor, saved in a batch backup file (*.iva). Refer to “Exiting the Simulator” (Page 7-5).
If one of the following cases applies for the batch

backup file (*.iva), display is not possible because Exit
the statistical information and the histogram
Exit the IV-Navigator.
information in operation has not been saved.
yyWhen saving has been done in the sensor with
the version of the sensor operation software
1 Select [File] → [Exit] from the menu bar.
When the program setting or image history has
which is less than R1.10
been changed, the confirmation dialog to save
yyWhen saving has been done without performing
appears.
judgment processing even once after power ON
or after program switching
yyWhen saving has been done with the Simulator 2 Click the [Yes] button.
Display is not performed when saving has been The change contents are saved in a batch
backup file (*.iva) and the IV-Navigator
7
done with the Simulator even when the settings
Simulator
or the image history have not been changed. terminates.
1 Select [File] → [Check Statistics/

Histogram in operation] from the menu [View] menu
bar.
The Statistics/Histogram screen in operation Message when activating IV Sensor
appears. Simulator
Switch is made between message display and no
message display when the [IV Sensor Simulation]
button is clicked.
Select [View] → [Message when activating IV
Sensor Simulator] from the menu bar, and then
select [Show]/[Hide].
When multiple tools have been set, the

statistical information and histogram
information at display can be switched by
selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.

[Image] menu Capture
Zoom

Save Image
Saves the bmp format file of the image displayed

Reduce in the Simulator and the ivp format file which can
Reduces the image displayed on the Simulator. be used for a master image registration or Tool
For details, refer to “Zoom Out” (Page 6-47). Auto Tuning at the same time.
The IV-Navigator’s screen will also be saved at
the same time (screenshot).

Enlarge
Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Save Image]
Enlarges the image displayed on the Simulator. from the menu bar.
For details, refer to “Zoom In” (Page 6-47).

Show saved image file location

Fit to Window
Opens the saving destination folder of the
Displays the image displayed on the Simulator captured image.
7 by fitting it to the screen size. Select [Image] → [Capture] → [Show saved
For details, refer to “Fit to Window” (Page image file location] from the menu bar.
Simulator
6-47).

Change saved image file location
Tool Display Options Opens the reference screen of a folder and
changes a saving destination of the captured
Switches the display method of the tool.
image.
For details, refer to “Tool Display Options” (Page
For details, refer to “Change saved image
6-47).
file location” (Page 6-48).
[Setting] menu
Language
Switches the display language of the IV-Navigator.
For details, refer to “Language” (Page 6-49).
The displayed language can be switched on the

Activation Menu screen of the IV-Navigator (Page
3-2).

[Window] menu Advanced Sensor Settings

Program Details Select [Window] → [Advanced Sensor Settings]
Displays the Program Details screen. from the menu bar.
Select [Window] → [Program Details] from the For details on the Advanced Sensor Settings screen,
menu bar. refer to “Setting the Advanced Information of the
For details on the Program Details screen, refer to Sensor” (Page 6-30).
“Displaying the Program Details screen” (Page
6-11). The following limitations apply for the Advanced
Sensor Settings screen with Simulator.
yyThe [Backup] tab and the [Initialize/Update] tab
are not displayed.
Sensor’s Internal Image History
yyThe sensor setting contents saved in the batch
Displays the Sensor’s internal Image history screen. backup file (*.iva) can be confirmed.
Select [Window] → [Sensor’s Internal Image History] yySetting change is possible for [Security] and
from the menu bar.
For details on the Sensor’s internal image history
[Device Name].
7
Simulator
screen, refer to “Sensor’s Internal Image History
(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is [Help] menu
NG)” (Page 6-15).
User's Manual
Following buttons and menus will not be displayed
in the Sensor’s internal image history screen of the Opens the User's Manual (PDF format) of the
Simulator. selected language.
yy[Refresh] button For details, refer to “User’s Manual” (Page 6-50).
yy[Inspection Tool Auto Tuning] button
yy[Batch Backup (*.iva)] menu
Version information
Displays the version information of the IV-Navigator.
I/O Settings For details, refer to “Version information” (Page
Displays the I/O Settings screen. 6-50).
Select [Window] → [I/O Settings] from the menu bar.
For details on the I/O Settings screen, refer to
“Setting the Input and Output Information of the
Sensor” (Page 6-26).
The [I/O Monitor] tab is not displayed on the I/O

Settings screen with Simulator.
Only confirmation is possible for [Polarity].

MEMO
7
Simulator

8
This chapter explains how the input/output terminal
controls each operation.
Controlling with
Input/Output Line
Controlling Timing of
Judgment with Triggers.....................................8-2
Importing the Status Output..............................8-4
Changing Over....................................................8-7
Registering the Master Image...........................8-8
Clearing Errors.................................................8-10
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on..........................................................8-11
Input Response Time.......................................8-12
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers
For details of the trigger, refer to “Setting

��
the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)�.
External trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External Trigger], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing
of inputting the external trigger input.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4

Min
100 μs Min 1.2 ms
ON
External trigger input (1) (5)
OFF
Processing time
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
Max 2 ms
Judgment process (3)

(internal)
Trigger delay
Total status output Min 0.2 ms
Status output of each tool ON
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
Position adjustment output OFF
Each logic output (4)
8
Max 2 ms
ON
Trigger error output
OFF
(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 μs for ON, and 1.2 ms for
OFF.
(2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is
performed.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid].
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.

When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-25) is NPN, and
indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP.
yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input.
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared,
when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6).

Internal trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal Trigger], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of
set trigger interval.
Internal trigger Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5
Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval

(1)
Processing time
(5)
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
Judgment process (3)

(internal)
Min 0.2 ms
Total status output
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
Position adjustment output OFF (4)
Each logic output
ON
OFF
(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.

8
(2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs

depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid].

yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6).
Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing
time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.
Operating in the shortest cycle

To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input
to 1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the output assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-60) to [Off] and
ignore the trigger error.

Importing the Status Output
Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on assigning to output line,
refer to “4.
��
Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)�.
Importing the total status / total status NG output

Overall status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be
checked.
External trigger/Internal
Trigger 1
trigger
Processing time
White line: OUT 2 ON

Assign the BUSY output OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Black line: OUT 1 ON
Assign the total status/ Previous total status result Total status result of Trigger 1
total status NG output OFF
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6).
yyWhen the total status result was OK, the total status output turns ON.
8 When the total status result was NG, the total status output turns OFF.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yy[All Tools OK]
When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position
adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK.
yy[Any Tool OK]
When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK,
the total status result is OK.
yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 4]
When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic

The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be
checked.
Trigger input Trigger 1
Processing time
Black line: OUT 1 ON

Assign the BUSY output OFF
Min 0.2 ms
White line: OUT 2 ON

Previous result Status result of Tool 1
Assign "Tool 1" OFF
Gray line: OUT 3 ON
Previous result Status result of Tool 2
Assign "Tool 2" OFF
Orange line: OUT 4 ON
Previous result Status result of Logic 1
Assign "Logic 1" OFF
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to “Changing the timing of the status output” (Page 8-6).
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually.
8
yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool / logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result

was NG or --.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

Changing the timing of the status output

The timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot]
which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to “Output
��
Settings” (Page 6-27)�.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2
trigger
ON
BUSY output
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Status output ON
Previous status result Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(Latching output) OFF
Status output ON
Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(One-Shot output) OFF
Delay time One-Shot ON Time Delay time One-Shot ON Time
yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment.

yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed.
yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns
OFF before each process is completed.
8 Cancelling One-Shot output

To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.
Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time

If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is
cancelled and is not output.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2
trigger Trigger input interval
(1)
ON
BUSY output
OFF
Internal process of Trigger ON
(2) Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)
1 OFF
Delay time One-Shot ON Time
Internal process of Trigger ON

(3) Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)
2 OFF
ON
Judgment process Status result of Trigger 1
OFF
(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.
(2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output
is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally.
(3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1
is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output.
yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by
a fluctuating BUSY time.
BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time

Changing Over
Changing Over
Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the
input line. For details of program functions, refer to “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page
6-6)�.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3
trigger
Min 10 ms
(1) (5)
Program bit0 to bit4 ON
PROG00 PROG01 PROG02
Input OFF
Switching time (T1) Switching time
BUSY output (2)

T2 (4)
ON
Program number PROG00 PROG01 PROG02
OFF
Min 0 ms
Total status output
Previous result Result from Trigger 1
Each logic output (3)
ON
OFF
(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched. 8
Minimum input time is 10 ms.

“When
��
switching the program by the external input” (Page 6-10)
(2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is
completed.
(4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels
the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the
canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings.
(5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page
4-60) under the Settings Navigator to [Valid]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed
after the switching program is completed.
yyFor details on T1 and T2, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 8-12).
yyUse this function during operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup.
yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal Trigger], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching
the program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur.
yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching
programs and external master registration process will vary.
yyThe response of an image displayed on the IV-Navigator might be delayed until after switching programs
(BUSY output OFF).

Registering the Master Image
The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line. For details
on master image registration, refer to “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image to be a Reference
for Judgment)” (Page 4-20)�.
(1) Trigger 1 (7) Trigger 2
trigger
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
External master registration ON
(2)
input OFF
Master image registration time (T3)
ON
BUSY output (3)
OFF
T4
Judgment process ON
Image of Trigger 1
(internal) OFF
(5)
ON
Master image (internal) Previous master image Image of Trigger 1
OFF
Total status output
ON (4)
Status output of each tool
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2
Each logic output
8 Error output
ON
OFF
(6) In case of failure
(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger.
(2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF
input time is 2 ms.
(3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs
depends on the settings.
(4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image
registration is completed.
(5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image.
(6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master
image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated
from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image
registration is succeeded or by the clear error input.
(7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new
master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.

yyFor details of T3 and T4, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 8-12).
yyUse this function during operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during
setup.
yyIf the trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when
the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error
within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [Valid].
y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the
y
system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled,
the image taken before cancellation is registered as a master image. The master image registration
process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings.
yyDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being
performed. The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary.
yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when
using Ext. Master Save?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the
internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to “Input
��
Settings” (Page 6-26)�.
Number of times that

ROM writing Master image is registered externally external master image 8
settings when power is turned OFF registration can perform

(duration)
The master image is not deleted.
Yes The image can be used as a master image after 100,000 times
starting up the device next time.
The master image is deleted.
No External master image registration needs to be No limit
performed after starting up the device.
yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is
in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode
before the power is turned OFF.
yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3).
Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.

Clearing Errors
Clearing Errors
If an error targeted for clearing is occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input.
Error occurred
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
ON (2)
Clear Error input
OFF
T5
(1)
ON
Error output
OFF
(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.

Error types which can be output are as follows.
yySystem error
yyStartup memory readout error
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under
Settings Navigator to [Valid].
8 yyFTP error
To output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-36) to [Enable].
(2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.
Errors which can be cleared are as follows.
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
yyFTP error
The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared.
yyFor details on T5, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 8-12).

Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when
starting operation.
Initializing BUSY
RUN Setting RUN System error
2 seconds or longer 20 ms or longer
ON
Power (DC24V)
OFF (1)
Determine the
I/O settings
(2)
Program number
Trigger Trigger
(3)
ON (4)
BUSY output
OFF
(5)
ON
Error output
OFF
(6)
ON
RUN output
OFF Min Min
Total status output

Min 0 ms 0.2 ms 0.2 ms
8

Each logic output
(1) After the power turned ON, the I/O settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined.
“Operation
��
for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-9)
“I/O
��
Polarity” (Page 6-28)
“Output
��
Settings” (Page 6-27)
(2) The program number will be determined. When the "Enable program switching through external input"
(Page 6-26) check box is set to ON , the program number is determined according to the inputting
condition of the input line.
(3) BUSY output function turns ON.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.
(4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.
(5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.
(6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.
When the Output Settings (Page 6-27) is [N.O.] : The status when the NPN or PNP open collector is ON.
When the Output Settings (Page 6-27) is [N.C.] : The status when the NPN or PNP open collector is OFF.
yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output
assignment for program numbers (Page 4-60) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs
are not being assigned, it will not be output.

Input Response Time
Input Response Time
The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response time differs greatly
depending on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for
securing from the affect of different response times.
Response time for the switch program input

T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the external master registration input

T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the error clear input

T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
8
Description for symbols
Symbols Description Time

Judgment process 400 (800) [ms] (typ.)
A
cancelling time * Added when it is input during the judgment process.
Total of the "Registration time x Number of set tools" for
following each tool
Position adjustment : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
B Tool registration time *
Outline : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
Color area : 100 [ms] (typ.)
Area : 100 [ms] (typ.)
860 [ms] (typ.)
Auto focus position
C Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto
adjustment time
Focus Adjustment Position] (Page 6-35) is set to [Individual].
3500 [ms] (typ.)
Nonvolatile memory
D Added only when the [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save]
saving time
(Page 6-26) is set to [Yes].
Trigger delay setting time (0 to 1000) [ms]
E Trigger delay time Added only when the [External Trigger] (Page 4-10) is selected
for trigger type.
* These are the times in case the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
The times for the version R1.00 are those inside ().

9
This chapter explains the specifications and
dimensions of the sensor and software.
Specifications
Specifications.....................................................9-2
Dimensions.........................................................9-5
Specifications

Specifications
Specifications
Sensor
Model IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Standard range Short range Long range
Installed distance
50 to 500mm 50 to 150mm 300 to 2000mm
Installed distance Installed distance
Installed distance 50 mm : 50mm : 300mm :
25 (H) x 18 (V) mm 12 (H) x 9 (V) mm 45 (H) x 33 (V) mm
View to to to
Installed distance 500mm : Installed distance Installed distance
210 (H) x 157 (V) mm 150mm : 2000mm :
36 (H) x 27 (V) mm 300 (H) x 225 (V) mm
1/3 inch 1/3 inch
Image sensor
color CMOS monochrome CMOS
Pixel 752 (H) x 480 (V)
Focus adjustment Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1
Exposure time 1/10 to 1/50,000 1/10 to 1/25,000 1/20 to 1/25,000 1/10 to 1/25,000
Amplifier type White LED Red LED Infrared LED
Light Lighting
Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable
method
Type Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, Position adjustment
9 Tool
Number*2 Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool
Switch settings
Specifications
32 programs
(programs)
Image Numbers 100 images*4 300 images*5
history*3 Condition NG only/All is selectable
OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchable
Statistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs,
numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors,
Analysis information *6
judge results list by tools
Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE),
numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs
HDR, High Gain, Color Filters*7, Digital Zoom*8, Brightness Correction,
Other functions Tilt correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run,
ToolAutoTune, Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*9
Indicators PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower,
Input ON current 2mA (short circuit)
For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 15V or higher,
OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)
Inputs 6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)
IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function Assignable functions :
Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration

Specifications
Model IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable
For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
Output remaining voltage 1.5V or lower
For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
remaining voltage 2V or lower
Outputs 4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)
Enable by assigning the optional functions
Assignable functions :
Function
Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result,
Judge result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool
Standard 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Ethernet*10
Connector M12 4pin connector
Network function FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET
Power
DC 24V ± 10% (including ripple)
voltage
Rating
Consumption
0.6A or less
current
Ambient
0 to +50°C (No freezing)
temperature
Relative
35 to 85%RH (No condensation) 9
humidity
Environmental
Specifications
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
resistance
Shock
500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance
Enclosure
IP67
rating*11
Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic,
Material
Mounting adapter : POM
Weight Approx. 270 g
*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the operation.
The focusing position can be registered by programs.
*2 Tools can be installed by programs.
*3 Saves to the memory in the sensor.
The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent
monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the software for IV (IV-H1).
*4 70 images when using the FTP client function
*5 210 images when using the FTP client function
*6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the IV software (IV-H1).
*7 Color type only.
*8 Monochrome type only.
*9 This function can be used with the software for IV (IV-H1).
*10 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software (IV-H1).
*11 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted.

Specifications
IV Software
Model IV-H1
Interface Equip the Ethernet (100BASE-TX) interface
Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *1
OS Windows XP Professional/HomeEdition
One of the OS must be installed.
Japanese / English / German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional)
Languages
/ Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean
Windows 7: Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS.
Processor
System Windows XP: Pentium III or better Clock speed 1 GHz or faster
requirements Windows 7: Needs to be compliant with system requirements for OS.
Memory capacity
Windows XP: 512 MB or more (1GB or more is recommended)
Required capacity
1 GB or more
for installation
Resolution 1024 × 768 pixel or higher,
Monitor
display color High Color (16bit) or higher
Operating
.NET Framework 2.0 SP 2 needs to be installed *2.
conditions
9 *1 Supported for 32bit and 64bit version.

*2 If .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 is not being installed, this will be automatically installed at the time of IV-H1
Specifications
installation.

Dimensions
Dimensions
Sensor
yyIV-500C yyIV-150M yyIV-500M yyIV-2000M

yyIV-500CA yyIV-150MA yyIV-500MA yyIV-2000MA
(102)
R
50
52
0
R5
Focusing position
(108) adjustment screw
41 (MF type only)
50 0.4 81.5
10.5 6 3-M3
(Depth 6mm)
10.5
20.5
50
57.4
Specifications
32.4
10.5
56 Mounting
adapter
58
1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)
20
WD reference
surface
45.5 25 4-M4
(Depth 6mm)

Dimensions
yyWith dome attachment

Installed distance : 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachment
Compatible sensor : Standard range type/Short range type
φ134
34.6
62
Distance from WD reference surface
yyWith polarizing filter attachment

32
φ56
9
5
Specifications
Distance from WD reference surface
Optional parts for the sensor
Dome attachment
yyIV-D10
90.4
φ134

Dimensions
Polarizing filter attachment Front cover

yyOP-87436 yyOP-87437 yyOP-87461
32 27.1 0.4
φ56
φ50
Mounting adapter
yyOP-87460
4-φ3.2
φ6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm
9
57
1/4-20UNC
Specifications
(Depth 6mm)
56
20
4-M4
(Depth 6mm)
17 25
Power I/O cable

yyOP-87440 yyOP-87441 yyOP-87442
(2m) (5m) (10m)
2000
5000
45 10000
φ15
120 5
φ6.7
150 5
180 5

Dimensions
Bracket
yyOP-87685
0.4 112.5 56
50
48.4
93
31.6
19.6
99
(99) 58
41
82.5
9
Specifications
Communication cables
Ethernet cable NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable

yyOP-87454 yyOP-87455 yyOP-87456 yyOP-87457 yyOP-87458 yyOP-87459
(2m) (5m) (10m) (2m) (5m) (10m)
φ6.5
φ6.2
16.8
14.7
φ14
φ15
2000 2000
5000 5000
44.7 10000 44.1 51.3 10000 47

Appendices
Status Table.......................................................A-2
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool................................. A-5
Settings List.......................................................A-6
Troubleshooting..............................................A-16
Error Messages...............................................A-19
Remedy when the PC cannot be
connected with the sensor............................. A-25
Initializing the Network Settings
(IP Reset Switch)............................................. A-35
Maintenance.....................................................A-36
Index.................................................................A-38
- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - A-1

Status Table
Status Table
Status table
Sensor operation indicator light

PC screen
Status
type PWR/ERR OUT TRIG
Waiting for a trigger OFF

*3
Judgment processing *5
*2 Lighting
Running Switching programs -
(green)
*9 OFF
Registering the external master image
During threshold adjustment on the

Test Blink
Test screen OFF *5
(green)
Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc.
Focus Adjustment (MF) OFF *14 OFF
Setting Automatically adjusting brightness Live
*13
Automatically adjusting the focus (AF)
Setup Adjustment Blink *15
OFF
(green)
I/O Monitor
- OFF
Others
Running -
Trigger error
Setting Live Blink (red) Same as normal
A Error External master registration error
System error - Lighting
OFF OFF
Startup memory readout error (red)
¡/Í indicates enable/disable of the input.

ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C).
yyFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG.
When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
“Setting
��
the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)
When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG.
*2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of [Sensor’s internal image history] screen in
the main screen of [Run].
*3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process.
OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red)
*4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process.
*5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal).
When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.
A-2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Status Table
Input Output
External Total Status / Total status NG /
External Switch Clear
master image BUSY Each tool / Each logic / RUN Error
trigger programs registration Error
Pos.Adj. *1
¡ ¡ ¡ OFF
*4
*7 *8
*10 *11 Í ON OFF
*6 ON
*12
*11 *10
Same
¡ as while
running
Í Í Í OFF OFF
OFF
*13
Í
OFF
*16 ← ← ← ← ← ←
Í Í Í Í OFF OFF OFF
Same as normal ¡ Same as normal

ON
A
OFF OFF
Í Í Í Í OFF
*17 *17 *17
*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.

*7 Stops the judgment process and switches.
*8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previous taken image as a master image.
*9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result
will be displayed.
*10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input.
*11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate.
*12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF.
*13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates.
*14 The flashing cycle of the orange light changes by linking to the focus indicator. The STATUS indicator
light operates in the same way.
*15 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated.
*16 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned
functions will not operate.
*17 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the
polarity (NPN/PNP) settings.
Additionally, refer to “Chapter

��
8 Controlling with Input/Output Line” (Page 8-1)�.

Status Table
Displaying and outputting the status result

Total Status
Judgment of each tool Total Status *2
NG
Status
Display
Output Display Output Output
Judgment Matching rate *1
Waiting for a trigger
-- --- OFF -- OFF OFF
(Not judged) *3
Judge is OK OK 0 to 100 ON
*4 *5
Judge is NG NG 0 to 100 OFF
Unable to judge *6 -- --- OFF *6 OFF ON
*1 When the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected.
The cut-off process (Page A-5) may be performed for the outline tool and the position adjustment tool.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
“Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)
*3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has
changed, or after a shift from the setting mode to the run mode.
*4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*6 The judgment of position adjustment tool cannot be determined if the judgment of each tool cannot be
determined at the time of using the position adjustment tool. For details, refer to “Displaying and
outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment” (Page A-4).
Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment
Position Judgment of each tool
A adjustment
Window
protrusion *1
Display/output
Pos. Adj. Outline
Total Total Status
Color Area/ Status *2 NG
result Area
View judgment OK OK/NG OK/NG
*3
No Status output ON ON/OFF ON/OFF *4
*5
View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100
Succeeded
View judgment OK OK/NG -- *6
*3
Yes Status output ON ON/OFF OFF *4
*7 *6
View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 ---
View judgment NG -- -- NG
Failed Status output OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
View matching rate 0 to 100 --- ---
*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area
(Page 4-17) at the time of position adjustment succeeded.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
“Setting the Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-63)
*3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*5 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected when the setting scale has been changed.
*6 For details of the target’s outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to “Matching rate
at the time of protrusion” (Page A-5)
*7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the
imaging area.

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position

Adjustment Tool
Matching rate at the time of Cut-off process of the matching rate
protrusion Cut-off process means the process where the
outline detection process is ended when no outline
zz
When the search region is “Entire”
exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value)
When the target outline protrudes from the
below the threshold value is found.
imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded
A matching rate which has been cut off becomes 0.
from the target for calculating the matching rate.
Because the cut-off value is linked to the threshold,
The matching rate decreases in proportion to
the cut-off value is also changed when the threshold
the protrusion amount.
is changed.
Tool window
Protruding outline (Cut-off value)
(excluded from the target for Matching rate Threshold
calculating the matching rate)
Current
matching rate
Outline to be targeted
for calculating the Cut-off processing range
matching rate (Range where the matching rate becomes 0)
Imaging area
zz
When the search region is “Partial”
The sensor searches the outline of the target that
is in the search region. The matching rate of the
A
target being out of search region will be “0”.
If the target is being protruded from the imaging
area, the matching rate will decrease depends
on how much the target is protruded from the
imaging area.
The above behavior is the case that the version

of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
For the version R1.00, the matching rate
decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.
When the tool window after position adjustment

is protruded from the imaging area, the judgment
display of the Color Area/Area tool becomes --
(Unable to judge) and the status output turns OFF.

Settings List
Settings List
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen
1 Image Optimization
Reference
Menu Description Setting range page
Internal Trigger
Trigger interval:1 to 10,000 ms
Select a type of the timing (default value: 50ms)
Trigger Options 4-8
to start imaging. External Trigger
Trigger delay:0 to 1,000 ms
(default value: 0ms)
Automatically adjusts a light
Automatic Brightness
intensity of the light and a - 4-11
Adjustment
shutter speed.
yyNormal (default value)
Select an imaging mode of
Imaging Mode yyHDR 4-11
the sensor.
yyHigh Gain
Displays a current
Exposure Time - 4-11
exposure time.
Standard range type (color)
Brightness 1 to 100
Adjustment Standard range type
Manually adjusts a light (monochrome)
Brightness intensity of the built-in light 1 to 120 4-11
and a shutter speed. Short range type
1 to 120
A Long rang type

1 to 100
Resets the image taken by
Undo the sensor to the state before - 4-11
brightness adjustment.
Manual focusing type
-
Adjusts focus of the
Focus Adjustment Auto focusing type 4-13
sensor.
yyAutomatic
yyManual
yyEntire
Imaging Area Sets an imaging area. 4-17
yyPartial
Digital Zoom Switches the digital zoom yyOFF (default value)
Imaging (Monochrome type only) to ON/OFF. 4-18
yyON
Area
Resets the sensor to the
Undo state before the settings - 4-16
were changed.
Extended Applies the color filters if an
Functions outline of a certain color cannot Unused (default value) /
Color Filters
be displayed when an image Red / Green / Blue / 4-18
(Color type only)
is displayed in monochrome Cyan / Magenta / Yellow
display by the color type sensor.
Switches to ON/OFF for yyON (default value)
Lighting 4-19
the built-in light. yyOFF
Lighting
Select a lighting mode for yyFlash (default value)
Lighting Mode 4-19
the built-in light. yyContinuous

Settings List
2 Master Registration
Reference
Registers the image
Register Live image as master imaged by sensor as a - 4-21
master image.
Registers an image history
Master Register image from image
stored in the sensor as a - 4-22
Registration history
master image.
Registers the image
Register image from file
file (*.iva or *.ivp) as a - 4-23
location
master image.
Sets a reference of yySettings
Extended
Brightness Correction brightness to the master yyDelete 4-25
Functions
image. yyTest
3 Tool Settings
Reference
Items Description Setting range page
Add Tool Newly sets a tool. - 4-31
Select the window shape
Window yyRect (default value)
to specify the area of a 4-35
Shape yyCircle
target to be detected.
Specifies an area to
Edit Window search an outline of the yyEntire
Search target. By specifying a (for no position
Region smaller area as a search adjustment)
4-37
A
area, the processing time yyPartial
will be shortened.
yyHigh Sensitivity
An extraction sensitivity of
yyNormal Sensitivity
Sensitivity an outline can be selected 4-37
(default value)
according to the target.
Fine Tune yyLow Sensitivity
Outline Judges by disabling the yyUndo
Remove unnecessary outlines yyRedo
4-38
Outline which interrupt the yyClear
Outline
stabilized detection. yySize

Adjusts a threshold used
Match 0 to 100 (default value: 70) 4-35
Limit in the OK/NG judgment.
Adjustment Live Displays the Test screen
- 4-35
Adjustment and adjusts a threshold.
Sets an arbitrary name to
Tool name - 4-38
the tool.
Sets a range of rotating 0 to ±180°
Rotation
direction to search an 4-39
Range (default value: ± 20°)
outline of the target.
Select whether or not to
Extended yyON (default value)
Margin allow the margin for the 4-40
Functions yyOFF
limited angle.
Select a detection mode yyHigh Accuracy
Search
of outline tool according (default value) 4-40
Algorithm
to the target. yyHigh Speed

Settings List
Reference
Select the window shape yyRect (default value)
Edit Window to specify an area of the yyCircle 4-44
target to be extracted. yyEntire
Angle Reset is set to [Rect], resets an - -
Adds of a circular/
Add Mask rectangular mask region 4-47
in the tool window frame. yyRect (default value)
Adds a circular/rectangular yyCircle
Cut Mask mask region for cutting the 4-47
Mask set mask region.
The previous operation
Undo - 4-47
can be cancelled.
Deletes a mask region
Clear - 4-47
which has been set.
yyExtract Area [+]
Click a color to be
yyExtract Area [-]
Color Extraction extracted on the master
yyUndo 4-44
(For color type) image and sets an
yyClear
extraction range.
yyto Live Image
Color Area/Area
Click brightness to be yyBrightness Range

Brightness Extraction extracted on the master yyUndo
4-44
(For monochrome type) image and sets an yyClear
A extraction range.
Adjusts a threshold used
yyto Live Image
Match 0 to 100 (default value: 50) 4-44

in the OK/NG judgment.
Upper Set an upper limit of the yyON
4-48
Limit threshold. yyOFF (default value)
Limit
Adjustment When an upper limit
yy0 to 200 (default value)
Scale setting is ON, select a 4-48
yy0 to 999
threshold scale.
Live Displays the Test screen
- 4-44
Sets an arbitrary name to
Tool name - 4-49
the tool.
Advanced Color Specifies a color to be yyH : 0 to 359
Extraction extracted as HSB (H: Hue, yyS : 0 to 255 4-51
(Color type only) S: Saturation, B: Brightness). yyB : 0 to 255
Based on a set color
Extended extraction value, a color
to Live
extraction condition can - 4-51
Functions Image
be confirmed in the Live
image.
Select a condition which yyDisable
Fixed Reference
the matching rate of the yyEnable: Large 4-51
Area
Color Area/Area is 100%. yyEnable: Small

Settings List
Reference
Select a window shape
Window to specify a range of the yyRect (default value)
4-55
Shape target to be the position yyCircle
adjustment reference.
Edit Window Specifies an area to search
a target to be a position
yyEntire
Search adjustment reference. By
(for no position adjustment) 4-57
Region specifying a smaller area as
yyPartial
a search area, the processing
time will be shortened.
yyHigh Sensitivity
An extraction sensitivity of
yyNormal Sensitivity
Sensitivity an outline can be selected 4-57
Position Adjustment
(default value)
according to a target.
Fine Tune yyLow Sensitivity
Outline Unnecessary outlines yyUndo
Remove which interrupts the steady yyRedo
4-58
Outline position adjustments can yyClear
be disabled. yySize
Adjusts a threshold which
judges whether the position 0 to 100
Match 4-55
Limit adjustment is succeeded or (default value: 70)
Adjustment failed.
Live Displays the Test screen
- 4-55
Sets a range to adjust a
Rotation 0 to ±180°
Extended
Range
position to the rotating
direction.
(default value: ± 20°)
4-59 A
Functions Select whether or not to
yyON (default value)
Margin allow the margin for the 4-59
yyOFF
limited angle.
Edits settings of the tool
Edit - 4-31
which has already been set.
Copies a tool which has
been set and pastes it to the
Copy same position. - 4-32
This is for Outline tool and
Color Area/Area tool.
Delete Deletes an unnecessary tool. - 4-32

Settings List
4 Output Assignment
Reference
yyTotal Status
yyTotal Status NG
yyRUN
Sets the output items to yyBUSY
OUT1 to OUT4 be assigned to the output yyError 4-61
line. yyPosition Adjustment
yyTool 01 to 16
yyLogic 1 to 4
yyOFF (not used)
Selects whether to enable/ yyValid
Trigger Error disable the output when the 4-61
trigger error occurred. yyInvalid (default value)
yyAll Tools OK
Selects a condition for
Total Status Conditions yyAny Tools OK 4-63
the total status result.
yyLogic 1 to 4
Extended Selects the logical operation yyAND
Logic 4-64
Functions method of logics. yyOR
Logic Settings
(Logic 1 to 4) yyUnused
Select tools to be assigned
(Tool selection) yyUsed 4-64
to the logic.
yyUsed (Inverse)

Settings List
Program Details screen

Reference
Copies the selected
Copy program to unregistered - 6-12
program.
Imports a program from
Import from File the batch backup file - 6-13
(*.iva).
Initializes the program
Initialize - 6-14
settings.
(Program list) Displays the program list. PROG_00 to PROG_31 6-11
Displays the master
(Master image) image of the currently - 6-11
selected program.
Edit Edits a program name. - 6-12
Displays the tools that
(Tool list) are registered in the - 6-11
selected program.
Changes to the selected
Change Program - 6-9
program

Settings List
I/O Settings screen

Reference
Sets a detection timing of yyExt. Trigger Rising
IN1 the trigger input for IN1 (default value) 6-26
input line. yyExt. Trigger Falling
Input
Assignment yyOFF (default value)
Sets a function to the yyProgram bit0 to bit4
IN2 to IN6 6-26
input line IN2 to IN6. yyClear Error
yyExt. Master Save
Input Sets whether or not to
Write ROM when write data into the ROM
yyOFF (default value)
using Ext. Master when the external master 6-26
yyON
Save? image registration is
Option performed.
Enable program Sets whether to enable/
yyOFF (default value)
switching through disable the external input 6-26
yyON
external input switch programs function.
Output Sets the output line yyN.O.
OUT1 to OUT4 6-27
Type settings (OUT1 to 4). yyN.C.
Output
yyLatching (default value)
Output Type Selects the output mode. 6-27
yyOne-Shot
Displays an input state
Input Monitor of external input in real - 6-28
I/O time.
A Monitor
Output Test
Confirms whether or
not each OUT output is
OFF
6-28
ON (default value)
correctly output.
Switches the polarity of NPN
I/O Polarity 6-28
the sensor. PNP

Settings List
Advanced screen
Reference
Displays a device name
Device Settings and MAC address of the 6-31
sensor.
Changes the device Device name :
Device Name 6-31
name. 16 characters
Change Network Changes the network
- 6-32
Settings settings of the sensor.
Displays the IP address
IP Address 6-32
of the sensor.
Subnet Displays the subnet mask 0.0.0.0 to
6-32
Mask of the sensor. 255.255.255.255
Default Displays the default 0.0.0.0 to
6-32
Gateway gateway of the sensor. 255.255.255.255
Displays the port number
PORT 63000 (default value) 6-32
of the sensor.
Environmental
yyDisable
Selects the communication
Protocol yyEtherNet/IP 6-33
Field protocol for the sensor.
yyPROFINET
Network
Handshake Enables/disables the yyEnable
6-33
Control handshake control of data. yyDisable
Sets the security of the yyOFF (default value)
Password Lock 6-34
sensor. yyON
A
Password, Inputs a password when
Security Enter password the password lock is - 6-34
for confirmation turned on.
Resets to the state before
Undo - 6-34
the new password was set.
Sets whether or not to
yyIndividual
Auto Focus Adjustment make the adjusting position
(default value) 6-35
Position for the auto focus common
yyCommon
to all programs.

Settings List
Reference
Transfers the image
data and status result yyEnable
FTP Client 6-36
information of the sensor yyDisable
memory to an FTP server.
Displays the IP address
IP Address - 6-36
of the FTP server.
Port Number Displays the port number. - 6-36
Input the user name for Up to 16 characters can
User Name 6-36
FTP logging in to the FTP server. be set.
Destination Input the password for Up to 16 characters can
Settings Password 6-36
logging in to the FTP server. be set.
Passive Enables/disables the yyEnable
6-36
Mode passive mode. yyDisable
Connection Tests the connection with
- 6-37
Test the FTP server.
Transfer Selects the transfer yyAll
6-37
Condition condition of image data. yyNG Only
FTP Selects the file saving yyIVP
File Format 6-37
format for image data. yyBMP
Transfer Transfer Transfers judgement
Condition yyEnable
Judgment results simultaneously 6-37
yyDisable
Results with the image data.
Turns ON the Error
yyEnable
A FTP Error output function for when
a file transfer failed.
yyDisable
6-38
Displays the transfer Up to 16 characters can

Folder 6-38
destination folder. be set.
Sets the file name of
Up to 16 characters can
File Name the image data to be 6-39
Transfer be set.
transferred.
Destination
Folder Input the upper limit
Index Upper
Settings of the numbers to be 0-65535 6-39
Limit
appended to file names.
Creates subfolders under
Create yyEnable
the transfer destination 6-39
Subfolder yyDisable
folder.

Settings List
Reference
Shapes can be adjusted
to the correct shape if yyOFF (default value)
Tilt Correction 6-40
a displayed image is yyON
distorted.
Adjustment Sets the adjustment yyVertical
Condition conditions of a tilt (default value) 6-40
Settings correction. yyHorizontal
Adjusts imaging for theTilt Same as Image
Image Settings 6-40
Correction. Optimization
Setup
Adjusts a white balance yyOFF
Adjustment
White Balance for the built-in camera of (default value) 6-42
the sensor. yyON
White Balance
Adjusts a white balance. - 6-42
Settings
Adjusts imaging for the Same as Image
Image Settings 6-42
White balance. Optimization
yyNormal
Changes a display
Image Display Direction (default value) 6-43
direction of an image.
yyRotate 180°
Backs up the data saved
Batch Backup in the sensor to the PC in - 6-21
a batch.
Transfers the settings
data (batch backup file)
Transfer Program Settings - 6-23
Backup saved in the PC to the
sensor.
A
Transfers the I/O polarity, yyEnable
Setting Transfer network settings and device (disabled after the transfer)
6-23
Options name simultaneously with yyDisabled
the settings data transfer. (default value)
Initializes the sensor
Initialize Sensor - 3-10
Initialize/ settings.
Update Updates the operation
Update Sensor - 6-44
software of the sensor.
Displays the model,
version, serial number,
Sensor Information MAC address, IP address, - 6-44
and device name of the
sensor.

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Check point Remedy page
The PWR/ERR indicator An error occurred. Check the Refer to "Error Message".
light of the sensor is lighting errors for lighting or blinking in A-19
or blinking in red. red.
Is the power cable correctly Connect the power cable
2-8
connected? correctly.
The power of the sensor
does not turn on. Is the voltage or capacity of Use a power source of the
the power source met the correct rating. 9-2
specification?
Place a target at the correct
Is the installed distance of the installed distance. The
2-2
target correct? installed distance is depending
on the sensor type.
Place the sensor in such a way
Is the sensor view correct? that the sensor view matches 2-2
the target size.
Adjust the focusing position
Is the focus adjustment correct? 4-13
(focus) of the sensor.
An image is not displayed Is the brightness adjustment Adjust brightness of the

4-11
on the IV-Navigator, or the correct? sensor.
image is abnormal. Is the target or the sensor Devise anti-vibration measures
-
vibrating? etc.
A Use brightness correction. 4-25
Does the ambient light affect
the image? Place the douser to prevent
-
the incident of ambient light.
Clean the front cover. Replace
Is the front cover dirty or
it with the spare front cover A-36
damaged?
(OP-87461).
Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update
6-48
in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].
yyStart the run mode
Is the system in the setting
yyTurn on the power of the 5-2
mode?
sensor again.
If a target is to be imaged
using an external trigger, input
the external trigger. When the
NPN is selected in the Polarity,
The image or the status
Is the trigger correctly input? the circuit becomes a non- 2-8
result is not updated. voltage input circuit. When the
PNP is selected in the Polarity,
the circuit becomes a voltage
input circuit. Check the cables.
All or part of the settings Complete the settings in
necessary for running have not Settings Navigator. 4-1
been completed.

Troubleshooting
Reference
Set the function of Update
The status result is displayed Is the function of Update Image
Image in the RUN mode to 6-48
but the image is not. in the RUN mode set to [OFF]?
[ON].
The network may be affected
by the traffic in the in-plant LAN.
Configure a local network and -
Image update is slow. Is the network connected to the confirm the network connection
(during operation/settings) in-plant LAN? only for the IV Series.
Set the function of Update
Image in the RUN mode to 6-48
OFF.
The password lock of the
Is the input screen for the
sensor is enabled. Input the 6-34
unlock password displayed?
IV-Navigator is not operated. unlock password.
The password is lost and cannot Contact your nearest
-
unlock. KEYENCE office.
Is the output line correctly Correctly connect to the control
2-8
connected? unit.
Set the output line and output
Is the output setting correctly
settings correctly in the 4-60
set?
Settings Navigator.
Is the system in the setting Start the run mode
mode?
5-2
A
Is the threshold correctly set? Set the threshold correctly. 5-14
The status result is not
yySet the detection tool correctly.
output.
Is the tool correctly set? yySet the position adjustment 4-30
tool correctly.
Set the NPN or PNP according
Is the Polarity correctly set? to the circuits of the control 6-28
unit.
Set the N.O. (normally open)
Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly or N.C. (normally closed)
6-27
set? according to the circuits of the
control unit.

Troubleshooting
Reference
Is the trigger condition set to Select [External Trigger] in
4-10
[External Trigger]? Trigger Options.
Is the input line correctly Correctly connect to the control
2-8
connected? unit.
Make the input line and input
Has the input setting been
settings correctly in [Input 6-26
An external trigger cannot made correctly set?
Settings].
be input.
When the NPN is selected
in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
Has the Polarity been correctly
circuit. When the PNP is 6-28
set?
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
The program number cannot Has the switching method for Place the check mark to the
be changed with the input “Enable program switching
the programs been correctly 6-26
line. through external input” check
set?
box.
Has the input line been Correctly connect to the control
2-8
correctly connected? unit.
Set the input line and input
Has the input setting been
settings correctly in [Input 6-26
correctly set?
A Settings].
When the NPN is selected
in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
Has the Polarity been correctly
circuit. When the PNP is 6-28
set?
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
IV-Navigator cannot be Refer to “Remedy when the
connect with sensor. Check the cables and settings. PC cannot be connected with A-25
the sensor”.
Image data cannot be Refer to “Remedy when data
Check the cables and settings. A-33
transferred via FTP. transfer via FTP is unavailable”

Error Messages
Error Messages
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor

The causes of, and remedies for, an error can be checked by observing the indicator light of the sensor.
PWR/ERR
indicator light
PWR/ERR
Cause Remedy
indicator status
ON In operation. -
Green Setting in progress.
Blink -
Operation stopped.
yyTurn on the power of this device.
A system error occurred. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
A startup memory read error
ON
occurred. yyInitialize the settings.
yyA data abnormality occurred
due to noise or because the
yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest A
KEYENCE office.
power switched OFF while
writing was in progress.
A trigger error occurred. yyThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the
A judgment process is not following procedures.
performed. yyNext normal trigger input
yyIf a target is to be imaged yyClear Error input
using an external trigger, the yySwitching the program number
Red external trigger will be input yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
during a BUSY status. yyDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status.
yyIf a target is to be imaged yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value
using an internal trigger, the that is longer than the processing time.
trigger interval will become yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [Disable]
shorter than the processing described in output assignment for the Settings
Blink time. Navigator (Page 4-60).
An external master image yyAn external master image registration error can be
registration error (without fixed using one of the following procedures.
registered master image) yySuccessful next external master image registration
occurred. The master image yyClearing the Error input
is not updated.
yySwitching the program number
yyThe image to be registered
as a master image was not yyProceeding to the settings screen for sensor
imaged. yyTaking an image to be registered as a master image
yyThe work memory is and register it as an external master image.
insufficient. yyDeleting one or more detection tools.

Error Messages
PWR/ERR
Cause Remedy
indicator status
The external master image
registration error (with
registered master image) yyAn external master image registration error can be
occurred. The following fixed using one of the following procedures.
errors occurred even though yySuccessful next external master image registration
the image was updated and yyClearing the Error input
registered as a master image.
yySwitching the program number
yyFor the new master image,
the outline cannot be yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
extracted with the outline yyChecking that the image to be registered and the
tool. detection tools/position adjustment settings are
Red Blink yyFor the new master image, applicable.
the area cannot be extracted
with the Color Area/Area tool.
An FTP error occurred. The
following errors occurred.
yyConnection with the FTP An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following
server failed. procedures.
yyTranfer to the transfer yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen.
destination folder failed. yyClear Error input.
yyThe transfer speed could yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.
not catch up the sensor
processing speed.
yyPower is not supplied to this
device. yyConnect the power cable correctly.
A OFF yyDuring focusing position

adjustment.
yyUse a power source of the correct rating.
yyComplete the focusing position adjustment.
(Manual focus type only)
Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON.
“Cables”
��
(Page 2-8)
“4.
��
Output Assignment (Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-60)

Error Messages
Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator

Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
Sensor system error happens. A system error occurred yyTurn on the power of the sensor
in the sensor. again.
Turn on sensor. yyIt is conceivable that a yyIf the same error occurs, contact *1
If not turned on, contact local fault occurred inside the your nearest KEYENCE office.
service center. sensor.
Sensor internal memory reading A memory read error yyInitialize the settings following
has failed. occurred when the the instructions on the screen.
sensor started. yyTurn on the power of the sensor
Turn on or initialize sensor. yyA data trouble occurred. again.
*1
yyIt is conceivable that yyDo not turn OFF the power
After this message is closed, the power was switched while saving the settings.
[Initialize] button will be OFF during writing, or yyIf the same error occurs, contact
displayed. noise was picked up. your nearest KEYENCE office.
Sensor program xx is damaged. A memory read error yyInitialize the settings following
Initialization is necessary. occurred when the the instructions on the screen.
sensor started. yyTurn on the power of the sensor
[Initialize] button will be yyA data trouble occurred again.
displayed. during the execution of yyDo not turn OFF the power
*1
program number xx. while saving the settings.
yyIt is conceivable that yyIf the same error occurs, contact
the power was switched your nearest KEYENCE office.
OFF during writing, or
noise was picked up.
A
Trigger error A trigger error occurred. yyAn trigger error can be fixed
Judgment processing has using one of the following
not been executed. procedures.
yyIf a target is to be yyNext normal trigger input
imaged using an yyClearing the Error input
external trigger, the yySwitching the program number
external trigger will be yyProceeding to the settings
input during a BUSY screen of the sensor
status. yyDo not input the external trigger
*2
yyIf a target is to be during a BUSY status.
imaged using an yySet the trigger interval of the
internal trigger, the internal trigger to a value that is
trigger interval will longer than the processing time.
become shorter than yyAn error will not occur if the
the processing time. trigger is set to [Disable]
described in output assignment
for the Settings Navigator (Page
4-60).

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
Some tools can not correctly judge An external master image yyAn external master image
because of insufficient outline registration error (with registration error can be fixed
extraction amount as a result of registered master image) using one of the following
“Ext. Master Save”. occurred. The following procedures.
(Matching rate is 0.) errors occurred even yySuccessful next external
Check tool configuration. though the image was master image registration
Some tools can not correctly updated and registered yyClearing the Error input
judged because area is 0 as a as a master image. yySwitching the program number
result of “Ext. Master Save”. yyFor the new master yyProceeding to the settings
(Matching rate is 0.) image, the outline screen of the sensor
Check tool configuration. *2
cannot be extracted yyChecking that the image to be
with the outline tool. registered and the detection
Brightness of brightness adjustment yyFor the new master tools/position adjustment
area is not adjustable as a result of image, the area cannot settings are applicable.
“Ext. Master Save”. be extracted with the yyAdjusting brightness of the
Check configuration of brightness Color Area/Area tool. image to be registered properly.
adjustment. yyThe brightness
correction cannot be
performed correctly for
the new master image.
Outer master registration fails An external master image yyAn external master image
because image is not captured. registration error (with no registration error can be fixed
registered master image) using one of the following
A occurred. The master

image is not updated.
procedures.
yySuccessful in next external
yyThe image to be master image registration
Outer master registration fails registered as a master yyClearing the Error input
because of lack of work memory. image was not imaged. yySwitching the program number
*2
yyThe work memory is yyProceeding to the settings
insufficient. screen of the sensor
yyTaking an image to be
registered as a mater image
and registering it as an external
master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection
tools.
Application error happens. An application failure yyReinstall the IV-Navigator (IV-H1).
occurred. yyReplace the PC.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
Registry access fails. A failure of the registry yyRestart the PC.
information occurred. yyReinstall the IV-Navigator (IV-H1).

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
Network adapter not found yyEthernet cable is not Refer to “Remedy when the
connected to the PC. PC cannot be connected with the
yyThe network adapter is sensor” (Page A-25).
not correctly connected
to the PC.
Sensor not found Searching the sensor
failed.
Data transfer to sensor fails. Connection is not possible
because data transmission
to the sensor failed.
Communication timeout to sensor Connection is not possible
happens. because there is no
response from the sensor.
Network connection to sensor can Connection is not possible
not be performed. because the IV-Navigator
is not correctly connected
with the sensor.
Network connection to sensor can Connection is not possible
not be performed. because the connection is
not correctly nor directly
connected with the sensor.
Specified sensor is being Connection is not possible Disconnect the presently
connected to other monitor or PC. because the specified connected monitor or PC and
sensor is connected to then re-connect it.
a different monitor or a
different PC. A
Only one monitor or PC
can be connected to a
sensor at the same time.
Writing in file fails. Saving the file to yySpecify the saving destination
the specified saving correctly.
destination has failed. yyConfirm the access privileges of
the saving destination.
Access to file or folder fails. Accessing to the yyConfirm the access privileges of
specified file or folder the saving destination.
failed. yyChange the attribute of the
read-only folder.
Disk space is insufficient. Saving is not possible Delete a file to make an enough
because the amount space for the saving destination.
of free space in the
specified saving
destination is insufficient.
This file configuration data is for The setting files for a Read the setting files of a sensor
xxxx. different model of the of the same model.
This file is not readable. sensors cannot be read.

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
FTP Connection Error Connection with the FTP Refer to “Remedy when data
server failed. transfer via FTP is unavailable”
(Page A-33).
FTP Transfer Error Data transfer to the
(Transfer Failed) transfer destination folder
failed.
*2
FTP Transfer Error Data which is larger than
(Insufficient Data Buffer) the remaining storage of
the FTP buffer has been
created and the transfer
failed.
*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red)

Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with the sensor
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected with

the sensor
Remedy when direct connection is unavailable
Status Remedy
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message.

yyMount the network adapter correctly to the PC.
yySet any IP address for the PC. Automatic IP address
acquisition cannot be applied.
Connection is not possible even by clicking “Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)”
the [Direct Connection] button in the (Page 2-16)
Activation Menu. yySupply the power to the sensor.
yyConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly
with an Ethernet cable.
“Connecting directly” (Page 2-11)
Click the [Connection start] button after a correct
connection.
yyRestart the PC and turn on the sensor power again.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above
remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” A
(Page A-35)
Connection became impossible after

connection was established once.
yyClick the [OK] button and close the message.
yyConnect the sensor and the PC correctly and directly
with an Ethernet cable.
“Connecting
��
directly” (Page 2-11)
Click the [Connection start] button after correct
connection.
yyIn the case of a network connection, change the
The network is connected to multiple configuration to network connection.
sensors or computers and other network “Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator
devices. (Network Connection)” (Page 3-6)

Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
Status Remedy
Connection is not possible even by clicking

the [Network Connection] button in the
Activation Menu. yyClick the [OK] button and close the message.
yyMount the network adapter correctly to the PC.
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
“Connecting
��
via network” (Page 2-11)
yyClick the [Search Sensor] button and search a sensor.
��
“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the
A connection cannot be established by searching the sensor”
(Page A-27).
Connection is not possible even by clicking yyInput the IP address of the sensor to be connected and
the [Connection start] button in the Network click the [Connection start] button to connect.
connection screen. “Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address”
(Page 3-8)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to “When the
connection cannot be established by specifying the
sensor” (Page A-28).
Connection became impossible after

connection was established once.

Status Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
searching the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
“Connecting
��
via network” (Page 2-11)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide
with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly
The sensor was not found using the [Search set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
Sensor] button on the Network connection “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC” (Page A-31)
screen. yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP
address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the
PC or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the network
setting for the sensor.
“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Direct
Connection)” (Page 3-6)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor”
(Page A-31)
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)”
(Page A-35)
yyThe following conditions are required for a successful
sensor search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and PC are matched.
yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address
is not duplicated. A

Status Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
specifying the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
“Connecting via network” (Page 2-11)
yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.
yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, connect by
the [Search Sensor] button.
��
“Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-7)
Connection is not possible even by inputting yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC does not coincide
the IP address into the Network connection with that of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly
screen and clicking the [Connection start] set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
button. “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC” (Page A-31)
yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP
address of the sensor does not coincide with that of
the PC or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet
mask and the default gateway.
Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator (Network
Connection)” (Page 3-6)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor”
A (Page A-31)
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)”
(Page A-35)

Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor

The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the LINK/
ACT indicator light and STATUS indicator light of the sensor..
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light

Displays the link status with the network.
LINK/ACT indicator
light
Status of the
LINK/ACT Status Remedy
indicator light
Correct link with the PC or the
ON
Ethernet switch.
Link is normal.
Green Correct link with the PC or the When connection with the IV-Navigator is not possible,
Blink
Ethernet switch.
Data are being sent and
check the STATUS indicator light. A
received.
No correct linking with the PC
or the Ethernet switch.
yySupply power to the sensor.
yyPower is not supplied to this
yySupply power to the PC or the Ethernet switch of the
OFF unit or the connection target.
connection target.
yyThe cable is not connected
yyConnect the cable correctly.
correctly.

STATUS indicator light

Indicates the connection status within the IV-Navigator.
Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS
indicator light.
STATUS indicator
light
Status of
the STATUS Status Remedy
indicator light
Correct connection with the
IV-Navigator.
The connection with the
ON -
IV-Navigator has been
established by acquiring the
IP address.
Green No correct connection with the For direct connection
A monitor. “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable”
The IP address of the (Page A-25)
Blink sensor has been acquired,
but connection with the IV- For network connection
Navigator has not been “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable”
established. (Page A-26)
For direct connection

No correct connection with the “Remedy when direct connection is unavailable”
PC. (Page A-25)
OFF
The IP address of the sensor For network connection
has not been acquired. “Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable”
(Page A-26)
yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated or may not
accept an operation with the STATUS indicator light turned on.
yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected PC cannot be connected.

Other methods of confirming a Confirming/Setting the IP address of

network connection the PC
yyFor details of confirming/setting the IP address of
Confirming the existence of the sensor the PC, refer to “Changing the PC settings (IP
from the PC address setting)” (Page 2-16).
yyConfirm that the IP address of the PC/sensor/
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected other network device does not coincide with. Also,
can be confirmed by sending a ping command from confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway
the PC to the sensor to be connected. are correctly set.
1 Select [All Programs] → [Accessories] →

[Command Prompt] from the [Start] menu
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
of Windows.
sensor
The Command Prompt screen opens.
Directly connect the sensor and the PC, and
2 Input "ping∆(IP address of the sensor)" (∆ confirm the IP address of the sensor.
indicates a "space") and press the <Enter> After returned to the network connection, set the
key. confirmed IP address of the sensor and confirm
whether the connection with the sensor is possible
or not.
1 Directly connect the sensor and the PC of

the confirmation/setting target.
3 Confirm the sent result of the ping command. ��
“Connecting directly” (Page 2-11)
zz
If correctly connected with a target sensor
“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator A
The responded time from the sensor (input IP
address) will be displayed, and [0% loss] will be
displayed. 2 Click the [Program] button.
For Windows XP, [0% loss] will be displayed.
zz
If not connected with a target sensor
A message which indicates a failure for sending
the ping command will be displayed, and [100%
loss] will be displayed.
For Windows XP, [100% loss] will be displayed.
4 After the confirmation, close the

Command Prompt screen. The confirmation dialog appears.
yyNote that when the ping command is executed

The IV-Navigator switches to the main screen in
to a device other than a sensor, the confirmation
will succeed if there is a response to the ping [Program].
command.
yyConfirmation is not possible for a direct
connection.

4 Click the [Advanced] button. 7 After confirmation/setting are completed,

click the [OK] button and exit from the
network settings.
8 Exit the IV-Navigator.

9 Connect the sensor and PC via a network.
“Connecting via network” (Page 2-11)
The Advanced Sensor Settings screen opens. (Network Connection)” (Page 3-6)
5 Select the [Environmental] tab and click

the [Change Network Settings] button. Confirming the router settings
When a router is used, confirm that the following
port is opened.
Sensor : 63000 (default value)
Network setting screen opens.

For the setting methods of the sensor port
6 Confirm the IP address of the sensor. number, refer to the following.
��
“Changing the network settings” (Page 6-32)
yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68.

yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the
server. It is generally 20 or 21.
A yyConfirm the firewall software on the PC whether
the port is available or not.
yyWhen the IP address of the sensor is to be

Confirming the firewall settings
changed, set the arbitrary IP address and click
the [OK] button. yyIf the Windows Security Alert dialog appears and
yyConfirm that the IP address of the sensor/PC/ the IV-Navigator is blocked by the Windows firewall,
other network device does not coincide with. click the [Allow access] button (for Windows 7) or
Also, confirm that the subnet mask and default the [Unblock] button (for Windows XP).
gateway are correctly set. y
y Confirm that an application or a port to be used is
yyWhen the [Reset] button is clicked, the setup being enabled in the firewall software of the PC.
values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], For the port number to be allowed to use, refer to
and [Default Gateway] will be reset and “Confirming the router settings” (Page A-32).
[Empty] will be displayed. [Port:] will be 63000.

Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable
Status Remedy
yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it
correctly.
yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it
correctly.
yyMoreover, confirm the firewall software on the PC
whether the port is available or not.
Connection with the FTP server failed.
yyConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
yyConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
FTP
��
Destination (Page 6-36)
yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder
is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the
transfer destination folder and perform the operation
A
again.
yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the
transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a
Data transfer to the transfer destination file with the same name exists, change the file name or
folder failed. change the transfer destination folder.
Transfer destination folder��
(Page 6-36)
yyWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the
[Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program]
screen after the transfer of untransferred data has
finished.
If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the

transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will
appear.

Status Remedy
yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor.
“Setting
��
the Trigger Options” (Page 4-8)
yyConfirm the stress status of the network.
Data which is larger than the remaining

storage of the FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
The network settings such as the IP address can Initializing the network settings
be initialized to the factory default by means of the
IP reset switch of the sensor.
1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover
indicated by the mark.
yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining the
sensor used in another network to a new network,
or when trouble occurs during connection. Remove only the fixing screw of the front
yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor. cover indicated by the mark. Do not remove
The connection will be interrupted. the front cover.
Indicator
Settings after initialization light
Settings after
Setting Items
initialization
mark
100/10Mbps
Communication speed
Automatically switches
IP address setting BOOTP
method (Bootstrap Protocol)
IP address 0.0.0.0*1, *2 2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in
*2 diameter) into the screw hole and press
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds.
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0*2
*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP
client function can be used. A
Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP
server or DHCP server except the IV-Navigator
to be connected.
*2 Becomes blank in the Network settings screen. Long and
“Changing
��
the network settings” (Page 6-32) thin pin
Connecting method after initialization The STATUS indicator light will blink twice
(orange) and then turn off.

For direct connection The network setting is initialized.
Connects automatically with BOOTP. There is
no need to set the IP address. 3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover.
“Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 N·m

For network connection
Search the sensor to be connected. A search
will be made for a sensor without an IP address,
set the IP address by following the instructions
on the screen.
“Searching for a sensor to be connected”
(Page 3-7)

Maintenance
Maintenance
Replacing the front cover

The front cover can be replaced with the optional
spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or
damaged.
Replace the front cover with the correct

procedure by following the precautions
below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67)
may not be maintained.
yyDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring.
yyAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.
1 Remove the old front cover and the

O-shaped ring.
O-shaped ring (small)
O-shaped ring
(large)
A
Front cover
Dedicated screw
2 Install the front cover after embedding the

O-shaped ring.
yyScrew: Dedicated screw × 2
Use the attached dedicated screw.
O-shaped ring (small)
O-shaped ring (large)
Dedicated screw
Front cover

Maintenance
MEMO

Index
Index
Numerics C
1. Image Optimization..........................................7-9 Cables..................................................................2-8
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)....4-6 Cancelling One-Shot output.................................8-6
2. Master Registration........................................7-10 Capture..................................................... 6-48, 7-20
2. Master Registration (Registering Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-6
an Image to be a Reference for Judgment)........4-20 Change saved image file location......................6-48
3. Tool Settings...................................................7-12 Changing Over.....................................................8-7
3. Tool Settings Changing the logging conditions of
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28 the image history................................................6-20
4. Output Assignment.........................................7-13 Changing the network settings...........................6-32
4. Output Assignment Changing the PC settings (IP address setting)....2-16
(Setting Details for Outputting to Output Line)...4-60 For Windows 7..............................................2-16
For Windows XP...........................................2-16
A Changing the saving destination of an image....6-22
Changing the timing of the status output..............8-6
Achieving adequate image brightness...............5-30
Checking errors by observing
If brightness cannot be adjusted due to
the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor....... A-19
uneven brightness........................................5-30
Checking the view and installed distance.............2-2
If brightness cannot be adjusted in
Check Statistics/Histogram in operation.............7-19
the Auto Brightness Adjustment....................5-30
Clearing Errors...................................................8-10
Achieving good focus.........................................5-31
Clearing the saved images.................................6-19
If good focus cannot be achieved by
Color Area/Area tool...........................................4-42
the Auto Focus Adjustment...........................5-31
Color filters (color type only)...............................4-18
Adding a tool......................................................4-31
Communication cables............................... 1-10, 9-8
Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a tool..............4-31
Confirming error messages of the IV-Navigator.... A-21
Adjusting brightness...........................................4-12
Confirming or deleting the images registered
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)........5-33
A Adjusting the installed distance (WD).................5-29
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14
for the Tool Auto Tuning......................................5-26
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the PC..... A-31
Confirming/Setting the IP address of
Advanced screen............................................... A-13
the sensor.......................................................... A-31
Advanced Sensor Settings....................... 6-49, 7-21
Confirming the existence of
Advanced settings for color extraction
the sensor from the PC..................................... A-31
(for color type only).............................................4-51
Confirming the firewall settings......................... A-32
Advanced settings for the sensor.......................6-30
Confirming the OK/NG images...........................5-26
Area tool.............................................................4-42
Confirming the registration results in
the test mode......................................................5-27
(auto focus type only).........................................6-35
Confirming the router settings........................... A-32
Confirming the saving destination of an image....6-22
B
Confirming the status by observing
Backing up in a batch.........................................6-21 the indicator light of the sensor......................... A-29
Backing up the image history in a batch.............6-19 Connecting directly.............................................2-11
[Backup] tab.......................................................6-31 Connecting method after initialization............... A-35
Basic adjustments........................... 5-34, 5-35, 5-36 For direct connection................................... A-35
Basic configurations of IV-Series..........................1-2 For network connection............................... A-35
Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4 Connecting the Ethernet cable...........................2-12
Basic Operation for Tools...................................3-11 Connecting the PC and multiple sensors.............1-3
Basic Operation of Simulator................................7-3 Connecting the PC and single sensor..................1-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3 Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor.....2-8
Batch Backup........................................... 6-44, 6-45 Connecting the sensor and the PC....................2-11
Bracket.................................................................1-9 Connecting via network......................................2-11
Brightness Adjustment........................................4-11 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......8-2
Brightness Adjustment settings..........................4-11 Converting IVP data to BMP data.......................6-52
Brightness Correction.........................................4-25

Index
Converting IVP Data to BMP Data Extended Functions for

Using the IVP-Converter....................................6-51 the Position Adjustment tool...............................4-59
Copying a program.............................................6-12 Extended functions items for
Copying a tool....................................................4-32 the Output Assignment.......................................4-62
Correcting the distorted images due to the Extended Functions of
installation..........................................................5-30 the Color Area/Area tool.....................................4-50
Cut-off process of the matching rate................... A-5 External trigger.....................................................8-2
D F
Default value......................................................4-61 Field Network.....................................................6-33
Deleting a tool....................................................4-32 [File] menu................................................ 6-45, 7-18
Deleting the OK/NG images...............................5-26 Finishing the Settings Navigator...........................4-5
Deleting the software (uninstall).........................2-15 Fit to Window......................................................6-47
Description for symbols......................................8-12 Fixed Reference Area.........................................4-51
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)...............4-18 Flow of the internal process...............................5-37
Disconnect..........................................................6-47 Focus Adjustment...............................................4-13
Displaying and outputting the status result.......... A-4 Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type......4-13
Displaying and outputting the status result Focus adjustment for
at the time of position adjustment........................ A-4 the manual focusing type...................................4-14
Displaying from the main screen in....................6-16 Folder composition and file naming rules...........6-25
Displaying from the main screen in [Run]...........6-16 For the processing time......................................5-37
Displaying the Program Details screen..............6-11 Front cover (for replacement)...............................1-9
Displaying the Sensor’s internal FTP.....................................................................6-36
image history screen..........................................6-16 [FTP] tab.............................................................6-30
Displaying the statistical information..................5-10
Displaying the tool information...........................5-12 H
Display methods for tools.....................................5-7
For color type..................................................5-7
Hardware............................................................2-14
[Help] menu.............................................. 6-50, 7-21
A
For monochrome type.....................................5-8
Hiding the statistical information.........................5-11
Dome attachment.................................................1-8
Hiding the tool information..................................5-13
E
I
Editing a program name.....................................6-12
Image display direction.......................................6-43
Editing a tool.......................................................4-31
[Image] menu........................................... 6-47, 7-20
Editing the tool window.......................................3-12
Image Optimization............................................. A-6
Enlarging the image display.................................5-6
Image while Running..........................................6-48
Environmental....................................................6-31
Imaging Area......................................................4-17
[Environmental] tab............................................6-30
Imaging the target widely...................................5-29
Error Messages................................................. A-19
Importing a program...........................................6-13
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).....................1-10
Importing the individual status output of
Exit........................................................... 6-46, 7-19
each detection tool / logic.....................................8-5
Exiting the sensor settings and
Importing the Status Output.................................8-4
starting an operation.............................................5-2
Importing the total status /
Exiting the Simulator............................................7-5
total status NG output...........................................8-4
Export....................................................... 6-45, 7-18
Infrared polarization filter attachment...................1-8
Extended Functions for
Initialization.........................................................3-10
the Image Optimization......................................4-16
Initialize Sensor........................................ 6-44, 6-47
Extended Functions for
[Initialize/Update] tab..........................................6-31
the Master Registration......................................4-25
Initializing a program..........................................6-14
Extended Functions for the Outline tool.............4-39
Initializing the network settings.......................... A-35
Extended functions for
Initializing the Network Settings
the Output Assignment.......................................4-62
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-35

Index
Initializing the sensor..........................................3-10 Master registration using the file saved in

Input circuit.........................................................2-10 the PC................................................................4-23
Input Response Time.........................................8-12 When using batch backup files (*.iva)...........4-23
Input Settings.....................................................6-26 When using image capture files (*.ivp).........4-24
Installation destination of the software Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
(reference)..........................................................2-15 Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5
Installed distance of the dome attachment...........2-6 Message when activating IV Sensor Simulator....7-19
Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................2-14 Mounting adapter.................................................1-9
Installing the IVP-Converter...............................6-51 Mounting the attachment......................................2-6
Installing the sensor at an angle.........................5-32 Mounting the dome attachment............................2-6
Internal trigger......................................................8-3 Mounting the mounting adapter............................2-4
I/O Monitor..........................................................6-28 Mounting from the jig side...............................2-4
I/O Polarity..........................................................6-28 Mounting on the wall.......................................2-4
I/O Settings............................................... 6-49, 7-21 Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
I/O Settings screen............................................ A-12 Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter...2-4
Items of extended functions for
the Master Registration......................................4-25 N
IV Sensor Simulation..........................................7-14
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-11
IV Software................................................. 1-10, 9-4
Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-11
Names and Functions of the Screen in
J [Run] / [Program]..................................................5-4
Judgment processing flow....................................1-6 NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable........................9-8
L (M12 4pin - RJ-45).............................................1-10
No-voltage input
Language................................................. 6-49, 7-20 (When the NPN output is selected)....................2-10
Lighting...............................................................4-19
A LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............... A-29
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2
O
Loading and confirming the saved images.........6-17 Open file.............................................................7-18
Operating conditions..........................................2-14
M Operating from the menu bar.............................6-45
Operating in the shortest cycle.............................8-3
Main screen for the Image Optimization....... 4-7, 7-9 Operating the image tool bar..............................3-11
Main screen for the Master Registration.... 4-20, 7-10 Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..............5-16
Main screen for the Output Assignment..... 4-60, 7-13 Operation flow of the Simulator............................7-3
Main screen for the Tool settings.............. 4-30, 7-12 Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator
Main screen in [Run] / [Program]..........................5-4 (Direct Connection)..............................................3-6
Main screen of the IVP Converter......................6-51 Operation for initial startup of the IV-Navigator
Main screen of the IV Sensor Simulation...........7-14 (Network Connection)...........................................3-6
For Color Area/Area tool...............................7-16 Operation for initial startup of the sensor.............3-9
For Outline/Position Adjustment tool.............7-14 Operation for the Tool Auto Tuning.....................5-17
Main screen of the Simulator................................7-6
Operation of the indicator light...........................1-12
Maintenance...................................................... A-36
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Manual Trigger...................................................6-48
Turned on...........................................................8-11
Manual trigger button.........................................6-48
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Margin...................................................... 4-40, 4-59
Optional parts for the sensor................................1-8
Mask settings.....................................................4-47
OS......................................................................2-14
Master Registration............................................. A-7
Other methods of confirming
Master registration from the image history in
a network connection........................................ A-31
the sensor...........................................................4-22
Outline tool.........................................................4-34
Output Assignment............................................ A-10
Output circuit......................................................2-10
Output Settings...................................................6-27
Index
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4 S
Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Overview of the program functions.......................6-6 Save...................................................................7-18
Overview of the screen in [Run] / [Program]........5-3 Save Image........................................................6-48
Save Program Settings List................................7-18
P Save Statistics/Histogram Data in operation......7-18
Saving all the image histories individually..........6-18
Polarized visible light filter attachment.................1-8 Saving images and screens displayed on
Polarizing filter attachment...................................9-7 the IV-Navigator individually...............................6-22
Position Adjustment tool.....................................4-53 Saving procedure...............................................6-22
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - stranded wire).......1-9 Saving the batch backup file................................7-3
Preparing the program functions..........................6-7 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images............6-21
Processing during an operation..........................5-33 Saving the sensor settings or the image history....6-21
Program Details........................................ 6-49, 7-21 Screenshot.........................................................3-11
Program Details screen..................................... A-11 Search Algorithm................................................4-40
Program Settings List.........................................6-45 Searching for a sensor to be connected...............3-7
Security..............................................................6-34
R Selecting a display method for tools.....................5-7
Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......5-33 Selecting a tool according to
Reducing the image blur....................................5-31 its intended purpose...........................................4-28
Reducing the shininess of the glossy or Selecting the tool................................................5-38
metal surface......................................................5-32 Selecting the tool by clicking it on the image........5-6
Registering the image files saved in the PC.......5-23 Selecting the tool from the status gauge..............5-6
Registering the images from Selecting the tool whose information to
the image history saved in the sensor................5-21 be displayed.........................................................5-6
Registering the Live image as a master image....4-21 Sensor.........................................................1-8, 1-11
Registering the master image...................4-21, 7-11 Sensor Information.............................................6-44
Registering the Master Image..............................8-8
Registering the OK/NG images to be used for
[Sensor Information] tab.....................................6-31
[Sensor] menu....................................................6-47 A
the Tool Auto Tuning...........................................5-19 Sensor’s Internal Image History............... 6-49, 7-21
Register the images taken with the sensor........5-19 Sensor’s Internal Image History (Confirming
Remedy when connection via the Images whose Status Result is NG).............6-15
a network is unavailable.................................... A-26 Sensor Update...................................................6-47
Remedy when data transfer via Setting a device name........................................6-31
FTP is unavailable............................................. A-33 Setting a search region............................ 4-37, 4-57
Remedy when direct connection is unavailable.... A-25 Setting a sensitivity................................... 4-37, 4-57
Remedy when the PC cannot be connected Setting a tool name............................................4-38
with the sensor.................................................. A-25 Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool..........4-42
Replacing the front cover.................................. A-36 Setting items for the Outline tool........................4-34
Required environment for Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool....4-54
the PC to be connected......................................2-14 Setting Logics.....................................................4-64
Reset Statistics...................................................6-47 [Setting] menu.......................................... 6-48, 7-20
Resetting to the Factory Default Settings...........3-10 Setting range of the Output Assignment.............4-61
Response time for the error clear input..............8-12 Settings after initialization.................................. A-35
Response time for Settings for disabling outlines................... 4-38, 4-58
the external master registration input.................8-12 Settings for the Trigger Options............................4-8
Response time for the switch program input......8-12 Settings List......................................................... A-6
Rotation Range........................................ 4-39, 4-59 Settings Navigator................................................4-2
Settings Navigator screen and
operation flow............................................... 4-4, 7-8
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup) screen.......... A-6
Settings Navigator (Sensor Setup Simulation).....7-8
Setting the Advanced Information of
the Sensor..........................................................6-30
Index
Setting the Color Area/Area tool.........................4-44 Stabilizing the position adjustment.....................5-34

Setting the Image Optimization............................4-6 If the outline of the reference target
Setting the Input and cannot be detected.......................................5-35
Output Information of the Sensor.......................6-26 If the position adjustment becomes
Setting the Outline tool.......................................4-35 unstable due to the effect of the unwanted
Setting the Output Assignment...........................4-61 outlines.........................................................5-34
Setting the password lock..................................6-34 If the target tilts and the position
Setting the position adjustment tool...................4-55 adjustment becomes unstable......................5-34
Setting the tool name.........................................4-49 Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Setting the Total Status Conditions.....................4-63 Starting the IV-Navigator......................................3-6
Setting the Trigger Options......................... 4-8, 4-10 Starting the IV Sensor Simulation......................7-17
Setting the upper limit.........................................4-48 Starting the Settings Navigator.............................4-3
Setting up the PC...............................................2-14 Starting the Simulator...........................................7-4
[Setup Adjustment ] tab......................................6-30 Starting up the IVP-Converter............................6-51
Shortening the imaging processing time............5-38 Statistics.............................................................6-46
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-37 Statistics/Histogram Data...................................6-45
Shortening the processing time of each tool......5-38 STATUS indicator light....................................... A-30
Shortening the processing time of Status table......................................................... A-2
the Color Area/Area tool.....................................5-39 System Configuration...........................................1-2
Shortening the processing time of
the Outline tool...................................................5-38 T
Shortening the processing time of Terminate IV-Simulator.......................................7-19
the position adjustment......................................5-39 The main screen for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-16
Show saved image file location..........................6-48 Things can be performed with the program
Simulator..............................................................7-2 functions...............................................................6-6
Simulator screen and operation flow....................7-4 Tilt Correction.....................................................6-40
Specification of the circuit and current of Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically
A the sensor...........................................................2-10
Specifications.......................................................9-2
Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15
Tool Auto Tuning by
Specifying sensor to be connected by the previous registration information..................5-27
IP address............................................................3-8 Tool Data............................................................6-46
Stabilizing by correcting Tool Display Options................................. 6-47, 7-20
the misaligned target position.............................5-33 Tool settings.......................................................5-33
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool....................5-36 Tool Settings........................................................ A-7
If the area search becomes unstable Transfer Program Settings....................... 6-44, 6-45
due to unwanted colors being extracted.......5-36 Transferring the backed up settings to
If the color you wish to judge cannot the sensor...........................................................6-23
be extracted..................................................5-36
Transferring to the sensor....................................7-5
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-29
Trigger number...................................................5-10
Stabilizing the judgment process by
Troubleshooting................................................. A-16
taking a clear image of the target.......................5-29
Turning on the power and starting an operation....5-2
Stabilizing the Outline tool..................................5-35
Types of tools.....................................................4-28
If the detection becomes unstable due to
the effect of the unwanted outline
other than the target.....................................5-35
U
If the match rate difference between Update Sensor...................................................6-44
the high and low-quality-targets is small.......5-36 Useful features during installation/adjustment......6-3
If the outline cannot be detected when Useful features while running...............................6-2
the target becomes out of position................5-35 User’s Manual.......................................... 6-50, 7-21
If the outline of the target cannot be Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment...............5-32
detected........................................................5-36 Using the digital zooming function......................5-29
If the target tilts and Using the dome attachment....................... 2-6, 5-32
the outline cannot be detected......................5-36 Using the image files saved in the PC................5-15
Using the image history saved in the sensor......5-15
Index
Using the images taken in the Test mode...........5-15

Using the polarizing filter attachment......... 2-7, 5-32
Using the program functions (changing over)......6-9
When switching the program by
the external input..........................................6-10
When switching the program in
the main screen in [Run].................................6-9
When switching the program in
the Program Details screen............................6-9
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)...........1-5
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................1-4
V
Version information................................... 6-50, 7-21
[View] menu.............................................. 6-46, 7-19
Voltage input
(When the PNP output is selected)....................2-10
W
When the NPN output is selected......................2-10
When the PNP output is selected.......................2-10
White Balance (for color type only)....................6-42
[Window] menu......................................... 6-49, 7-21
Z
Zoom........................................................ 6-47, 7-20
Zoom In..............................................................6-47 A
Zoom Out...........................................................6-47

Revision history
Revision history Edition number Revision details
January, 2012 1st edition
August, 2012 2nd edition Addition of screw hole (1/4-20UNC) to the mounting adapter.
Compatibility with German / Chinese (Simplified) /
Chinese (Traditional).
Addition of the Simulator function.
Correction of the “2.” of the Software License Agreement
December, 2012 4th edition Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese /
Korean.
Addition of Logic output / Total Status NG output / RUN output.
Addition of the FTP client function.
Compatibility with field networks (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET).
Addition of the IVP-Convertor.
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models
or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products
found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered
to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole
option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be
defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but
not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture,
vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only
suggestions, and it is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended
use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE
harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH
NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY
RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED
ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES,
OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED
OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may
not apply.
BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets
and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2012 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244003E 1122-4 207GB Printed in Japan

Users Manual PC Software IV Series Visio PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Users Manual PC Software IV Series Visio PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

207GB

(PC Software) 7 Simulator

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Safety Information for IV Series

Safety precautions on LED product

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 3

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

4 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Software License Agreement

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 5

Version of the IV Series

Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

6 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Structure of This Manual

A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 7

8 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Specifying sensor to be connected by 3. Tool Settings

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 9

Correcting the distorted images due to

10 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

tool...............................................................5-38 Setting the Input and Output Information of

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 11

Manual trigger button...................................6-48 Export..........................................................7-18

12 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Confirming/Setting the IP address of

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 13

14 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 1-1

1 Basic configurations of IV-Series

Connecting the PC and single sensor

Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

1-2 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Connecting the PC and multiple sensors

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 1-3

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

1-4 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 1-5

1 Judgment processing flow

Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the

According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target

Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor.

1-6 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

- IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) - 1-7

Checking the Package Contents

yyIV-500C yyIV-150M yyIV-500M yyIV-2000M

Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1

Optional parts for the sensor

Polarized visible light filter attachment Infrared polarization filter attachment

Mounting screw x 2 Mounting screw x 2

Polarized visible light Infrared polarization

1-8 - IV Series User's Manual (PC Software) -

Power I/O cable Front cover (for replacement)

Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1

“Installing the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)” (Page 2-14)

4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable

IN1 - IN6 * Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /

IN1 - IN6 Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1